3RW30/40 System Manual

Soft starters
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual • 01/2010
Industrial Controls
Answers for industry.
Industrial Controls
Soft starters
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual
Introduction
1
Safety information
2
Product description
3
Product combinations
4
Functions
5
Application planning
6
Installation
7
Installation / mounting
8
Connecting
9
Operation
10
Configuration
11
Commissioning
12
Technical data
13
Dimension drawings
14
Typical circuit diagrams
15
Accessories
16
Appendix
01/2010
535 1995-02 DS01
A
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and safety
instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying
risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Ordernumber: 3ZX1012-0RW30-1AC1
®‹ 01.2010
Copyright © Siemens AG 2009.
Technical data subject to change
Table of contents
1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11
1.1
2
3
4
Safety information .................................................................................................................................. 13
2.1
Before commencing work: Isolating the equipment from the supply system and ensuring that it
cannot be reconnected. ............................................................................................................. 13
2.2
Five safety rules for work in or on electrical systems ................................................................ 13
Product description ................................................................................................................................ 15
3.1
Fields of application................................................................................................................... 15
3.2
3.2.1
Basic physical principles of a three-phase induction motor....................................................... 15
Three-phase induction motor ..................................................................................................... 15
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters........................................ 17
Method of operation of a two-phase controlled soft starter ....................................................... 20
Starting current asymmetry ....................................................................................................... 21
Applications and use ................................................................................................................. 22
3.4
Comparison of device functions ................................................................................................ 24
Product combinations ............................................................................................................................ 25
4.1
5
Important notes.......................................................................................................................... 11
SIRIUS modular system ............................................................................................................ 25
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 27
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
Start modes ............................................................................................................................... 27
Voltage ramp ............................................................................................................................. 27
Current limiting and ramp-up detection (3RW40 only) .............................................................. 29
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
Stop modes ............................................................................................................................... 30
Stop without load (3RW30 and 3RW40) .................................................................................... 31
Soft stop (3RW40 only) ............................................................................................................. 31
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
Motor protection / intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only) ...................................................... 32
Motor protection function ........................................................................................................... 32
Intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only) ................................................................................... 35
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
Functions of the RESET buttons ............................................................................................... 36
SIRIUS 3RW40 2, 3RW40 3, and 3RW40 4 soft starters .......................................................... 36
SIRIUS 3RW40 5 and 3RW40 7 soft starters ............................................................................ 38
Other functions of the RESET button ........................................................................................ 39
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
Functions of the inputs .............................................................................................................. 40
Start input (terminal 1) on 3RW30 and 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 .................................................. 40
Start input (terminal 3) on 3RW40 5 and 3RW40 7 ................................................................... 40
Thermistor input / connection on 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 ........................................................... 41
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
Functions of the outputs ............................................................................................................ 41
3RW30: Output terminal 13 / 14 ON .......................................................................................... 41
3RW40: Output terminals 13 / 14 ON / RUN and 23 / 24 BYPASSED ...................................... 42
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
5
Table of contents
6
5.6.3
3RW40: Group fault output at terminal 95 / 96 / 98 OVERLOAD / FAILURE ............................ 43
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
Diagnostics and fault signals ..................................................................................................... 44
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 44
3RW40: LEDs and troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 46
Application planning .............................................................................................................................. 51
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
7
Installation ............................................................................................................................................... 53
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
8
9
11
6
Installing the soft starter............................................................................................................. 53
Unpacking .................................................................................................................................. 53
Permissible mounting position ................................................................................................... 53
Mounting dimensions, clearances, and assembly type ............................................................. 54
Assembly type: Standalone assembly, side-by-side assembly, direct mounting ....................... 55
Installation requirements ............................................................................................................ 56
Installation / mounting ............................................................................................................................ 57
8.1
General information ................................................................................................................... 57
8.2
Five safety rules for work in or on electrical systems ................................................................ 58
8.3
General feeder assembly (type of coordination 1)..................................................................... 59
8.4
Soft starter with line contactor (type of coordination 1).............................................................. 60
8.5
Soft starter assembly with type of coordination 2 ...................................................................... 61
8.6
Capacitors to improve the power factor ..................................................................................... 62
8.7
Maximum cable length............................................................................................................... 63
Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 65
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
10
Application examples................................................................................................................. 51
Roller conveyor application ........................................................................................................ 51
Hydraulic pump application ........................................................................................................ 52
Electrical connection.................................................................................................................. 65
Control and auxiliary terminals .................................................................................................. 65
Main circuit connection .............................................................................................................. 65
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 69
10.1
Operator controls, displays, and connections on the 3RW30.................................................... 69
10.2
Operator controls, displays, and connections on the 3RW40.................................................... 70
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 73
11.1
11.1.1
11.1.2
Configuration in general............................................................................................................. 73
Configuration procedure ............................................................................................................ 73
Selecting the optimum soft starter ............................................................................................. 74
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
Startup class .............................................................................................................................. 76
Application examples for normal starting (CLASS 10) with 3RW30 and 3RW40 ...................... 77
Application examples for heavy-duty starting (CLASS 20): 3RW40 only .................................. 78
11.3
ON time and switching frequency .............................................................................................. 79
11.4
Reducing the rated data ............................................................................................................ 80
11.5
Installation altitude and ambient temperature............................................................................ 80
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Table of contents
12
11.6
11.6.1
11.6.2
Calculating the permissible switching frequency ....................................................................... 81
Table of permissible assembly combinations with switching frequency factors ........................ 81
Calculating the switching frequency (example) ......................................................................... 84
11.7
11.7.1
11.7.2
11.7.3
11.7.4
Configuration aids...................................................................................................................... 86
Online configurator .................................................................................................................... 86
Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation software ................................................................... 86
Technical Assistance ................................................................................................................. 86
SIRIUS soft starter training course (SD-SIRIUSO) .................................................................... 87
11.8
Order number system for the 3RW30........................................................................................ 88
11.9
Order number system for the 3RW40........................................................................................ 89
Commissioning ....................................................................................................................................... 91
12.1
Before commencing work: Isolating the equipment from the supply system and ensuring that it
cannot be reconnected. ............................................................................................................. 91
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
12.2.4
12.2.5
12.2.6
Commissioning the 3RW30 ....................................................................................................... 92
Commissioning procedure ......................................................................................................... 92
Quick commissioning of the 3RW30 and optimization of the parameters ................................. 93
Setting the soft start function ..................................................................................................... 94
Setting the starting voltage ........................................................................................................ 95
Setting the ramp time ................................................................................................................ 95
ON output .................................................................................................................................. 96
12.3
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 97
12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
12.4.5
12.4.6
12.4.7
12.4.8
12.4.9
Commissioning the 3RW40 ....................................................................................................... 98
Commissioning procedure ......................................................................................................... 99
Quick commissioning of the 3RW40 and optimization of the parameters ............................... 100
Setting the soft start function ................................................................................................... 101
Setting the starting voltage ...................................................................................................... 102
Setting the ramp time .............................................................................................................. 102
Current limiting in conjunction with a starting voltage ramp and ramp-up detection ............... 103
Setting the motor current ......................................................................................................... 103
Setting the current limiting value ............................................................................................. 104
Ramp-up detection .................................................................................................................. 104
12.5
12.5.1
Setting the soft stop function ................................................................................................... 105
Setting the ramp-down time ..................................................................................................... 105
12.6
12.6.1
12.6.2
12.6.3
Setting the motor protection function....................................................................................... 105
Setting the electronic motor overload protection ..................................................................... 106
Motor current settings .............................................................................................................. 107
Motor protection acc. to ATEX ................................................................................................. 107
12.7
Thermistor motor protection .................................................................................................... 108
12.8
Motor protection trip test.......................................................................................................... 108
12.9
12.9.1
12.9.2
12.9.3
Functions of the outputs .......................................................................................................... 109
Functions of the BYPASSED and ON / RUN outputs .............................................................. 109
Parameterizing the 3RW40 outputs ......................................................................................... 110
Function of the FAILURE / OVERLOAD output ....................................................................... 112
12.10
RESET MODE and functions of the RESET / TEST button .................................................... 113
12.10.1 SIRIUS 3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4. soft starters ........................................................................... 113
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
7
Table of contents
12.10.2 SIRIUS 3RW40 5. to 3RW40 7. soft starters ........................................................................... 115
12.11
13
Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 121
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6
13.1.7
13.1.8
13.1.9
13.1.10
13.1.11
13.1.12
13.1.13
13.1.14
13.1.15
13.1.16
13.1.17
3RW30..................................................................................................................................... 121
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 121
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and normal starting ............................. 122
3RW30..-.BB.. control electronics ............................................................................................ 123
3RW30..-.BB.. control times and parameters .......................................................................... 123
3RW30..-.BB.. power electronics ............................................................................................. 124
3RW30 13, 14, 16, 17, 18-.BB.. power electronics .................................................................. 124
3RW30 26, 27, 28-.BB.. power electronics .............................................................................. 125
3RW30 36, 37, 38, 46, 47-.BB.. power electronics .................................................................. 125
3RW30 main conductor cross-sections ................................................................................... 126
3RW30 auxiliary conductor cross-sections .............................................................................. 127
Electromagnetic compatibility according to EN 60947-4-2 ...................................................... 127
Recommended filters ............................................................................................................... 128
Types of coordination .............................................................................................................. 128
Fuseless version ...................................................................................................................... 129
Fused version (line protection only) ......................................................................................... 130
Fused version with SITOR 3NE1 fuses ................................................................................... 131
Fused version with SITOR 3NE3/4/8 fuses ............................................................................. 132
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
3RW40..................................................................................................................................... 134
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 134
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and normal starting (CLASS 10) ......... 135
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and normal starting (CLASS 10) (with
thermistor motor protection evaluation) ................................................................................... 137
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and normal starting (CLASS 10) ......... 139
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and heavy-duty starting (CLASS 20) .. 141
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and heavy-duty starting (CLASS 20) .. 143
3RW40 2., 3., 4. control electronics ......................................................................................... 145
3RW40 5., 7. control electronics .............................................................................................. 145
3RW40 2., 3., 4. control electronics ......................................................................................... 146
3RW40 5., 7. control electronics .............................................................................................. 146
3RW40 protection functions ..................................................................................................... 147
3RW40 control times and parameters ..................................................................................... 147
3RW40 2. to 7. power electronics ............................................................................................ 148
3RW40 24, 26, 27, 28 power electronics ................................................................................. 149
3RW40 36, 37, 38, 46, 47 power electronics ........................................................................... 150
3RW40 55, 56, 73, 74, 75, 76 power electronics ..................................................................... 151
3RW40 2., 3., 4. main conductor cross-sections ..................................................................... 152
3RW40 5., 7. main conductor cross-sections .......................................................................... 153
3RW40 .. auxiliary conductor cross-sections ........................................................................... 154
Electromagnetic compatibility according to EN 60947-4-2 ...................................................... 154
Recommended filters ............................................................................................................... 155
Types of coordination .............................................................................................................. 155
Fuseless version ...................................................................................................................... 156
Fused version (line protection only) ......................................................................................... 157
Fused version with SITOR 3NE1 fuses ................................................................................... 158
Fused version with SITOR 3NE3/4/8 fuses ............................................................................. 159
Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW40 (with symmetry) ..................................... 161
13.2.4
13.2.5
13.2.6
13.2.7
13.2.8
13.2.9
13.2.10
13.2.11
13.2.12
13.2.13
13.2.14
13.2.15
13.2.16
13.2.17
13.2.18
13.2.19
13.2.20
13.2.21
13.2.22
13.2.23
13.2.24
13.2.25
13.2.26
13.2.27
8
3RW40: LEDs and troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 117
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Table of contents
13.2.28 Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW40 (with asymmetry) ................................... 161
13.3
14
15
Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation software ................................................................. 162
Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................................. 163
14.1
3RW30 for standard applications ............................................................................................ 163
14.2
3RW40 for standard applications ............................................................................................ 164
Typical circuit diagrams ....................................................................................................................... 167
15.1
Typical circuit for the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation..................................... 167
15.2
15.2.1
15.2.2
Control by pushbutton ............................................................................................................. 168
Control of the 3RW30 by pushbutton ...................................................................................... 168
Control of the 3RW40 by pushbutton ...................................................................................... 169
15.3
15.3.1
15.3.2
Control by switch ..................................................................................................................... 170
Control of the 3RW30 by switch .............................................................................................. 170
Control of the 3RW40 by switch .............................................................................................. 171
15.4
15.4.1
15.4.2
Control in automatic mode....................................................................................................... 172
Control of the 3RW30 in automatic mode ................................................................................ 172
Control of the 3RW40 in automatic mode ................................................................................ 173
15.5
15.5.1
15.5.2
Control by PLC ........................................................................................................................ 175
Control of the 3RW30 with 24 V DC by PLC ........................................................................... 175
Control of the 3RW40 by PLC ................................................................................................. 176
15.6
15.6.1
15.6.2
Control with an optional main / line contactor.......................................................................... 177
Control of the 3RW30 with a main contactor ........................................................................... 177
Control of the 3RW40 with a main contactor ........................................................................... 178
15.7
15.7.1
15.7.2
Reversing circuit ...................................................................................................................... 180
3RW30 reversing circuit .......................................................................................................... 180
3RW40 reversing circuit .......................................................................................................... 181
15.8
15.8.1
15.8.2
15.8.3
Control of a magnetic parking brake........................................................................................ 183
3RW30 motor with magnetic parking brake ............................................................................. 183
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4, control of a motor with a magnetic parking brake ............................... 184
3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7, control of a motor with a magnetic parking brake ............................... 185
15.9
15.9.1
15.9.2
15.9.3
Emergency stop....................................................................................................................... 186
3RW30 emergency stop and 3TK2823 safety relay ................................................................ 186
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 emergency stop and 3TK2823 safety relay ......................................... 187
3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 emergency stop and 3TK2823 safety relay ......................................... 189
15.10
3RW and contactor for emergency starting ............................................................................. 191
15.10.1 3RW30 and contactor for emergency starting ......................................................................... 191
15.10.2 3RW40 and contactor for emergency starting ......................................................................... 192
15.11
15.11.1
15.11.2
15.11.3
16
Dahlander / multispeed motor ................................................................................................. 194
3RW30 and Dahlander motor starting ..................................................................................... 194
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 and Dahlander motor starting .............................................................. 195
3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 and Dahlander motor starting .............................................................. 197
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 199
16.1
Box terminal blocks for soft starters ........................................................................................ 199
16.2
Auxiliary conductor terminals................................................................................................... 199
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
9
Table of contents
A
10
16.3
Covers for soft starters ............................................................................................................ 199
16.4
Modules for RESET ................................................................................................................. 200
16.5
Link modules to 3RV10 motor starter protectors ..................................................................... 201
16.6
Link modules to 3RV20 motor starter protectors ..................................................................... 201
16.7
Optional fan to increase the switching frequency (3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.)............................ 202
16.8
Spare parts for fans (3RW40 5., 3RW40 7.)............................................................................ 202
16.9
Operating instructions.............................................................................................................. 202
Appendix ................................................................................................................................................ 203
A.1
Configuration data ................................................................................................................... 203
A.2
Table of parameters used........................................................................................................ 205
A.3
Correction sheet ...................................................................................................................... 206
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Introduction
1.1
1
Important notes
Purpose of the manual
This manual contains fundamental information and practical tips for using SIRIUS soft
starters. The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters are electronic motor control devices
that facilitate optimal starting and stopping three-phase induction motors.
The manual describes all of the functions of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters.
Target group
This manual is intended for any user involved in
•
Commissioning
•
Servicing and maintaining
•
Planning and configuring systems
Basic knowledge required
A general knowledge of the field of electrical engineering is required to understand this
manual.
Scope of validity
The manual is valid for the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters. It describes the
components that are valid at the time of publication. SIEMENS reserves the right to include a
Product Information for each new component, and for each component of a later version.
Standards and approvals
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters are based on the IEC/EN 60947-4-2 standard.
Disclaimer of liability
It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to ensure that a system or machine is functioning
properly as a whole. SIEMENS AG, its regional offices, and associated companies
(hereinafter referred to as "SIEMENS") cannot guarantee all the properties of a whole plant
system or machine that has not been designed by SIEMENS.
Similarly, SIEMENS can assume no liability for recommendations that appear or are implied
in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty, or liability claims beyond the scope
of the SIEMENS general terms of supply are to be derived or inferred from the following
description.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
11
Introduction
1.1 Important notes
Orientation aids
The manual contains various features supporting quick access to specific information:
•
At the beginning of the manual you will find a table of contents.
•
A comprehensive index at the end of the manual allows quick access to information on
specific subjects.
Continuously updated information
Your regional contact for low-voltage switchgear with communications capability will be happy
to help you with any queries you have regarding the soft starters. A list of contacts and the
latest version of the manual are available on the Internet at (www.siemens.com/softstarter):
For all technical queries, please contact:
Technical Assistance:
Phone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8°° - 17°° CET) Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
e-mail: (mailto:[email protected])
Internet: (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance)
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of the manual. Please use it to record your
suggestions for improvements, additions, and corrections, and return the sheet to us. This will
help us to improve the next edition of the manual.
12
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Safety information
2.1
2
Before commencing work: Isolating the equipment from the supply
system and ensuring that it cannot be reconnected.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage Will cause death or serious injury.
• Disconnect the system and all devices from the power supply before starting work.
•
Secure against switching on again.
•
Verify that the equipment is not live.
•
Ground and short-circuit.
•
Erect barriers around or cover adjacent live parts.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage Will cause death or serious injury.
Qualified Personnel.
The equipment / system may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel.
For the purpose of the safety information in these Operating Instructions, a "qualified person"
is someone who is authorized to energize, ground, and tag equipment, systems, and circuits
in accordance with established safety procedures.
2.2
Five safety rules for work in or on electrical systems
A set of rules, which are summarized in DIN VDE 0105 as the "five safety rules", are defined
for work in or on electrical systems as a preventative measure against electrical accidents:
1. Isolate
2. Secure against switching on again
3. Verify that the equipment is not live
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Erect barriers around or cover adjacent live parts
These five safety rules must be applied in the above order prior to starting work on an
electrical system. After completing the work, proceed in the reverse order.
It is assumed that every electrician is familiar with these rules.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
13
Safety information
2.2 Five safety rules for work in or on electrical systems
Explanations
1. The isolating distances between live and deenergized parts of the system must vary
according to the operating voltage that is applied.
"Isolate" refers to the all-pole disconnection of live parts.
All-pole disconnection can be achieved, e.g. by.:
- Switching off the miniature circuit breaker
- Switching off the motor circuit breaker
- Unscrewing fusible links
- Removing LV HRC fuses
2. The feeder must be secured against inadvertent restarting to ensure that it remains
isolated for the duration of the work. This can be achieved, for instance, by securing the
motor and miniature circuit breakers with lockable blocking elements in the disconnected
state, either using a lock or by unscrewing the fuses.
3. The deenergized state of the equipment should be verified using suitable test equipment,
e.g. a two-pole voltmeter. Single-pole test pins are not suitable for this purpose. The
absence of power must be established for all poles, phase to phase, and phase to N/PE.
4. Grounding and short-circuiting are only mandatory if the system has a nominal voltage
greater than 1 kV. In this case, the system should always be grounded first and then
connected to the live parts to be short-circuited.
5. These parts should be covered, or barriers erected around them, to avoid accidental
contact during the work with adjacent parts that are still live.
14
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Product description
3.1
3
Fields of application
Soft starters are used to start three-phase induction motors with reduced torque and reduced
starting current.
SIRIUS soft starter family
The SIEMENS SIRIUS soft starter family comprises three different versions with different
functionalities and prices.
3RW30 and 3RW40
Simple or standard applications are covered by the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters
and are described in this manual.
3RW44
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is used if higher functionality is specified, e.g. communication
over PROFIBUS or the availability of measuring and monitoring values, as well as for ultraheavy-duty starting. The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is described in a separate system
manual.
Download from 3RW44 manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
llisapi.dll?func=cslib.csinfo&lang=de&objid=21772518&caller=view).
3.2
Basic physical principles of a three-phase induction motor
SIRIUS soft starters are used to reduce the current and torque of a three-phase induction
motor during the startup process.
3.2.1
Three-phase induction motor
Fields of application
Three-phase induction motors are used in a wide range of applications in commerce, industry,
and trade owing to their simple, robust design and their minimal maintenance.
Problem
If a three-phase induction motor is started directly, its typical current and torque
characteristics can cause disturbances in the supply system and the load machine.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
15
Product description
3.2 Basic physical principles of a three-phase induction motor
Starting current
Three-phase induction motors have a high direct starting current Istarting. Depending on the
motor type, this current can be between three and fifteen times as high as the rated
operational current. Seven or eight times the motor's rated current can be assumed as a
typical value.
Disadvantage
This results in the following disadvantage:
•
Higher load on the electrical supply system. The supply system must therefore be
dimensioned for this higher power during the motor startup.
0RWRUFXUUHQW
,
,'LUHFW
RQOLQH
VWDUWLQJ
,1RP
Q1RP
Figure 3-1
0RWRUVSHHG
Q
Typical starting current characteristic of a three-phase induction motor
Starting torque
The starting torque and the breakdown torque can usually be assumed to be between two
and four times the rated torque. From the point of view of the load machine, this means that
the starting and acceleration forces exert a higher mechanical load on the machine and the
product being conveyed compared to nominal operation.
16
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Product description
3.3 Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft
Disadvantages
This results in the following disadvantages
•
A higher load is placed on the machine's mechanical components
•
The costs for replacing worn parts and maintaining the application are higher
0RWRU
WRUTXH
0
0VWDOO
0'LUHFWVWDUW
0RWRU
01RP
0$FFHOHUDWLRQ
0/RDG
HJSXPS
Q1RP
Figure 3-2
0RWRUVSHHG
Q
Typical starting torque characteristic of a three-phase induction motor
Remedy
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 electronic soft starters allow the current and torque
characteristics during starting to be optimally adapted to the requirements of each application.
3.3
Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters have two antiparallel thyristors in two out of the
three phases. One thyristor for the positive half-wave and one for the negative half-wave is
provided in each phase (refer to Fig. "Phase angle control and schematic diagram of a twophase controlled soft starter with integral bypass contacts"). The current in the third,
uncontrolled phase is the sum of the currents in the controlled phases.
The rms value of the motor voltage is increased (from a settable starting voltage) to the rated
motor voltage within a definable ramp-up time by means of the phase angle control.
The motor current changes in proportion to the voltage applied to the motor. As a result, the
starting current is reduced by the factor of this voltage.
There is a quadratic relationship between the torque and the voltage applied to the motor. As
a result, the starting torque is reduced quadratically in relation to this voltage.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
17
Product description
3.3 Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters
Example
SIEMENS 1LG4253AA motor (55 kW)
Rated data at 400 V
P e:
55 kW
I e:
100 A
Idirect starting:
Approx. 700 A
M e:
355 Nm ; e.g.: Me = 9.55 x 55 kW x
n e:
1480 rpm
Mdirect starting:
Approx. 700 Nm
Set starting voltage:
50 % (½ of mains voltage)
PLQ
=> Istarting ½ of direct starting current (approx. 350 A)
=> Mstarting ¼ of direct starting torque (approx. 175 Nm)
The diagrams below show the starting current and torque characteristics for a three-phase
induction motor in combination with a soft starter:
0RWRUFXUUHQW
,
, 'LUHFW
RQOLQH
VWDUWLQJ
, 6RIWVWDUWHU
, 1RP
Q
Figure 3-3
18
1RP
0RWRUVSHHG
Q
Reduced current characteristic of a three-phase induction motor during starting with a
SIRIUS 3RW30 or 3RW40 soft starter
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Product description
3.3 Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft
0RWRUWRUTXH
0
0'LUHFW
RQOLQH
VWDUWLQJ
01RP
06RIWVWDUW
YROWDJHUDPS
Q1RP
0RWRUVSHHG
Q
0/RDGHJSXPS
Figure 3-4
Reduced torque characteristic of a three-phase induction motor during starting with a
SIRIUS 3RW30 or 3RW40 soft starter
Soft start /soft stop
This means that, since the motor voltage is controlled by the electronic soft starter during the
startup process, the consumed starting current and the starting torque generated in the motor
are also controlled.
The same principle is applied during the stop process. This ensures that the torque generated
in the motor is gradually reduced, so that the application can stop smoothly (the soft stop
function is only supported by the 3RW40).
The frequency remains constant during this process and corresponds to the mains frequency,
in contrast to frequency controlled starting and stopping of a frequency converter.
Bypass mode
Once the motor has been started up correctly, the thyristors are subject to fully advanced
control, meaning that the whole mains voltage is applied to the motor terminals. As the motor
voltage does not have to be controlled during operation, the thyristors are bridged by integral
bypass contacts that are rated for AC1 current. This minimizes the waste heat generated
during uninterrupted duty (which is caused by the thyristor's power loss), and minimizes
heating up of the switching device's environment.
The bypass contacts are protected by an integrated, electronic arc quenching system during
operation. If they are opened in the event of a fault, e.g. if the control voltage is temporarily
interrupted, mechanical vibrations occur, or the coil operating mechanism or the main contact
spring has reached the end of its service life and is defective, the equipment is not damaged.
The diagram below shows the method of operation of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft
starters:
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
19
Product description
3.3 Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters
/
8
8//
˞
/
˞
˞
/
//
*
˳
0
a
Figure 3-5
3.3.1
Phase angle control and schematic diagram of a two-phase controlled soft starter with integral bypass
contacts
Method of operation of a two-phase controlled soft starter
A special method of operation is used for the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 two-phase
controlled soft starters based on SIEMENS' patented "polarity balancing" control principle.
Two-phase control
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters are two-phase controlled soft starters, in other
words they are designed with two antiparallel thyristors in each of phases L1 and L3. Phase 2
is an uncontrolled phase, which is merely guided through the starter by a copper connection.
In a two-phase controlled soft starter, the current that results from the superimposition of the
two controlled phases flows in the uncontrolled phase. The main advantages of two-phase
control include the more compact size compared to a three-phase version and the lower
hardware costs.
The occurrence of DC components, caused by the phase angle and the overlapping phase
currents, is a negative physical effect of two-phase control during the startup process that can
mean a louder noise is produced by the motor. The "polarity balancing" control principle was
developed and patented by SIEMENS to prevent these DC components during starting.
,$
,$
WV
Figure 3-6
20
,$
WV
WV
Current characteristic and occurrence of DC components in the three phases without "polarity
balancing"
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Product description
3.3 Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft
Polarity balancing
"Polarity balancing" effectively eliminates these DC components during the ramp-up phase. It
allows the motor to be started up with a constant speed, torque, and current rise.
The acoustic quality of the startup process comes very close to that of a three-phase
controlled startup. This is made possible by the continuous dynamic alignment and balancing
of current half-waves with different polarities during the motor startup.
,$
,$
WV
Figure 3-7
3.3.2
,$
WV
WV
Current characteristic in the three phases without DC components thanks to "polarity balancing"
Starting current asymmetry
With two-phase control the starting current is asymmetrical for physical reasons, because the
current in the uncontrolled phase is the sum of the currents in the two controlled phases.
This asymmetry can be as much as 30 to 40% during starting (ratio of minimum current to
maximum current in all three phases).
Even though this cannot be influenced, it is not critical in most applications. It could cause an
insufficiently rated fuse to trip in the uncontrolled phase, for instance. For recommended fuse
ratings, refer to the tables in chapter Technical data [Page 121].
,$
,$
WV
Figure 3-8
,$
WV
WV
Starting current asymmetry
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
21
Product description
3.3 Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters
Note
If wye-delta starters are exchanged for soft starters in an existing system, you should check
the fuse ratings in the feeder in order to avoid false tripping. This is particularly important in
connection with heavy-duty starting or if the fuse that is installed has already been operated
close to the thermal tripping limit with the wye-delta assembly.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses, motor starter protectors, and switching
devices) must be dimensioned for direct starting and according to the on-site short-circuit
conditions, and ordered separately.
For recommended fuse and motor starter protector ratings for the feeder with soft starter,
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
3.3.3
Applications and use
Applications and selection criteria
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters represent a good alternative to direct or wyedelta starters.
The most important advantages are:
•
Soft start
•
Soft stop (3RW40 only)
•
Uninterrupted switching without current peaks that place a heavy load on the system
•
Simple installation and commissioning
•
Compact, space-saving design
Applications
The typical applications include:
22
•
Conveyor belts
•
Roller conveyors
•
Compressors
•
Fans
•
Pumps
•
Hydraulic pumps
•
Agitators
•
Circular saws / band saws
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Product description
3.3 Functional principle of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft
Advantages
Conveyor belts and transport systems:
•
Smooth starting
•
Smooth stopping
Rotary pumps and piston pumps:
•
No pressure surges
•
Increased service life of the pipe system
Agitators and mixers:
•
Reduced starting current
Fans:
•
Protection for the gearbox and V belt
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
23
Product description
3.4 Comparison of device functions
3.4
Comparison of device functions
5DWHGFXUUHQWDWr&br&
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH
0RWRUUDWLQJDW9bb9
ವ6WDQGDUGFRQQHFWLRQ
ವ,QVLGHGHOWDFLUFXLW
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH
6RIWVWDUWVRIWVWRS
9ROWDJHUDPS
6WDUWLQJVWRSSLQJYROWDJH
5DPSXSDQGUDPSGRZQWLPH
7RUTXHFRQWURO
6WDUWLQJVWRSSLQJWRUTXH
7RUTXHOLPLWLQJ
5DPSWLPH
,QWHJUDWHGMXPSHUFRQWDFWV\VWHP
,QWULQVLFGHYLFHSURWHFWLRQ
0RWRURYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
7KHUPLVWRUPRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
,QWHJUDWHGUHPRWH5(6(7
6HWWDEOHFXUUHQWOLPLWLQJ
,QVLGHGHOWDFLUFXLW
%UHDNDZD\WRUTXH
&UHHSVSHHGLQERWKGLUHFWLRQVRIURWDWLRQ
3XPSVWRS
'&EUDNLQJ
&RPELQHGEUDNLQJ
0RWRUKHDWLQJ
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
([WHUQDOGLVSOD\DQGRSHUDWRUFRQWUROPRGXOH
6WDWXVPHDVXUHGYDOXHGLVSOD\
(UURUORJ
(YHQWVOLVW
0LQPD[SRLQWHUIXQFWLRQ
7UDFHIXQFWLRQ
3URJUDPPDEOHFRQWUROLQSXWVDQGRXWSXWV
1XPEHURISDUDPHWHUVHWV
3DUDPHWHUL]LQJVRIWZDUH6RIW6WDUWHU(6
3RZHUVHPLFRQGXFWRUVWK\ULVWRUV
6FUHZWHUPLQDOV
6SULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
8/&6$
&(PDUN
6RIWVWDUWLQJXQGHUKHDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJ
6XSSRUWIRUFRQILJXUDWLRQ
)XQFWLRQDYDLODEOHದIXQFWLRQQRWDYDLODEOH
)RU5:RQO\VRIWVWDUW
2SWLRQDOXSWRVL]H6GHYLFHYDULDQWV
24
$
9
6,5,865:
6WDQGDUGDSSOLFDWLRQV
N:KS N:KS ದ
r&
6,5,865:
6WDQGDUGDSSOLFDWLRQV
6,5,865:
+LJK)HDWXUHDSSOLFDWLRQV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
V
V
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
FRQWUROOHGSKDVHV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
FRQWUROOHGSKDVHV
:LWK352),%86'3RSWLRQ
RSWLRQ
FRQWUROOHGSKDVHV
ದ
ದ
:LQ6RIW6WDUWHUHOHFWURQLFVHOHFWLRQVOLGHU7HFKQLFDO$VVLVWDQFH
)RU5:WR5:IRU
1RWSRVVLEOHLQLQVLGHGHOWDFLUFXLW
5:DQG5:RSWLRQDO
7UDFHIXQFWLRQZLWK6RIW6WDUWHU(6VRIWZDUH
,IQHFHVVDU\RYHUGLPHQVLRQVRIWVWDUWHUDQGPRWRU
$FFWR$7(;
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Product combinations
4.1
4
SIRIUS modular system
Switching, protecting, and starting motors
In order to simplify the assembly of load feeders, the SIRIUS modular system offers standard
components that are optimally harmonized and are easy to combine. Just 7 sizes cover the
entire performance range up to 250 kW / 300 hp. The individual switching devices can be
assembled to form complete load feeders, either using link modules or by mounting directly.
For a selection of matching device combinations, e.g. soft starters and motor starter
protectors, refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
For further information on individual products, refer to System manual (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
llisapi.dll?aktprim=0&lang=en&referer=%2fWW%2f&func=cslib.csinfo&siteid=csius&caller=vi
ew&extranet=standard&viewreg=WW&nodeid0=20025979&objaction=csopen) "Innovations
in the SIRIUS modular system", Order No. 3ZX1012-0RA01-1AB1.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
25
Product combinations
4.1 SIRIUS modular system
6,5,86PRWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRUV
596 596
6(17521FLUFXLWEUHDNHUV
596
596
9/9/
9/9/
9/9/
6,5,86FRQWDFWRUV
576
576
576
576
576
5%6
5%6
5%6
5:6
5:6
5:6
576
576
6,5,86RYHUORDGUHOD\V
5%6
5%6
5%66
6,5,86VRIWVWDUWHUV
5:6
Figure 4-1
26
5:6
5:66
SIRIUS modular system
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.1
5
Start modes
You can choose between different startup functions reflecting the wide range of applications
and functionality of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters. The motor start can be
optimally adapted to each particular application.
5.1.1
Voltage ramp
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters achieve soft starting by means of a voltage
ramp. The motor terminal voltage is increased from a parameterizable starting voltage up to
the mains voltage within a definable ramp-up time.
Starting voltage
The starting voltage determines the starting torque of the motor. A lower starting voltage
results in a lower starting torque and a lower starting current. The starting voltage selected
must be sufficiently high to ensure that motor starts up smoothly as soon as the start
command is received by the soft starter.
Ramp time
The length of the set ramp time determines the time taken to increase the motor voltage from
the parameterized starting voltage to the mains voltage. This influences the motor's
acceleration torque, which drives the load during the ramp-up process. A longer ramp time
results in a lower acceleration torque as the motor is started up. The startup is slower and
smoother as a result. The ramp time should be long enough for the motor to reach its nominal
speed. If the time selected is too short, in other words if the ramp time ends before the motor
has started up successfully, a very high starting current that can even equal the direct starting
current at the same speed occurs at this instant.
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter limits the current to the value set with the current limiting
potentiometer (refer to chapter Current limiting and ramp-up detection (3RW40 only) [Page
29]). As soon as the current limiting value is also reached, the voltage ramp or the ramp time
is interrupted and the motor is started with the current limiting value until it has started up
successfully. In this case, the motor ramp-up time may be longer than the maximum
parameterizable 20 seconds ramp time (for further information about the maximum ramp-up
times and switching frequencies, refer to chapter 3RW40 2. to 7. power electronics [Page
148] ff).
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter has intrinsic device protection, current limiting, and ramp-up
detection functions. These functions do not form part of the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
27
Functions
5.1 Start modes
CAUTION
Risk of property damage
When using the 3RW30: Make sure the selected ramp time is longer than the actual motor
ramp-up time. If not, the SIRIUS 3RW30 may be damaged because the internal bypass
contacts close when the set ramp time elapses. If the motor has not finished starting up, an
AC3 current that could damage the bypass contact system will flow.
When using the 3RW40: The 3RW40 has an integrated ramp-up detection function that
prevents this operating state from occurring.
The maximum ramp time for the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter is 20 seconds An appropriately
dimensioned SIRIUS 3RW40 or 3RW44 soft starter should be chosen for startup processes
with a motor ramp-up time > 20 seconds.
9ROWDJHLQ
80RWRU
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
VWDUWYROWDJH
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
VWDUWLQJWLPH
6KRUWVWDUWLQJWLPH
/RQJHUVWDUWLQJWLPH
Figure 5-1
9ROWDJHDW
WKHPRWRU
7LPHW
V
Principle of the voltage ramp
0RWRUWRUTXH0
1P
0'LUHFWRQOLQHVWDUWLQJ
PD[LPXPWRUTXH
WKDWFDQEHJHQHUDWHG
01RP
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
VWDUWYROWDJH
$FFHOHUDWLRQ
WRUTXH
6SHHGQ
PLQ
06RIWVWDUW
6KRUWUDPSWLPH
06RIWVWDUW
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
WRUTXHVWDUWLQJWLPH
0RWRUKDVUXQXSDQGLV
LQQRPLQDORSHUDWLRQQ1RP
/RQJHUUDPSWLPH
0/RDGHJ)DQ
Figure 5-2
28
Principle of the voltage ramp for the torque characteristic
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.1 Start modes
0RWRUFXUUHQW,
$
,'LUHFW
RQOLQH
VWDUWLQJ
,6RIWVWDUWHU
,1RP
Q1RP 0RWRUVSHHG
Q
,6RIWVWDUWHU
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
UDPSWLPH
6KRUWUDPSWLPH
,6RIWVWDUWHU
/RQJHUUDPSWLPH
Figure 5-3
Principle of the voltage ramp for the starting current characteristic
Typical applications of the voltage ramp
The voltage ramp principle is valid for all applications, e.g. pumps, compressors, conveyor
belts.
5.1.2
Current limiting and ramp-up detection (3RW40 only)
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter measures the phase current (motor current) continuously with
the help of integrated current transformers.
The motor current that flows during the startup process can be actively limited by means of
the soft starter. The current limiting function takes priority over the voltage ramp function. As
soon as a parameterizable current limit is reached, in other words, the voltage ramp is
interrupted and the motor is started with the current limiting value until it has started up
successfully. The current limiting function is always active with SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters. If
the current limiting potentiometer is set to the clockwise stop (maximum), the starting current
is limited to five times the set rated motor current.
Current limiting value
The current limiting value is set to the current required during starting as a factor of the rated
motor current. Since the starting current is asymmetrical, the set current corresponds to the
arithmetic mean value for the three phases.
Example
If the current limiting value is set to 100 A, the currents might be approx. 80 A in L1, 120 A in
L2, and 100 A in L3 (refer to chapter Starting current asymmetry [Page 21]).
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
29
Functions
5.2 Stop modes
As soon as the selected current limiting value is reached, the motor voltage is reduced or
controlled by the soft starter to prevent the current from exceeding the limit. The set current
limiting value must be high enough to ensure that the torque generated in the motor is
sufficient to accelerate the motor to nominal speed. Three to four times the value of the
motor's rated operational current (Ie) can be assumed as typical here.
The current limiting function is always active because it is required by the intrinsic device
protection. If the current limiting potentiometer is set to the clockwise stop (maximum), the
starting current is limited to five times the set rated motor current.
Ramp-up detection (3RW40 only)
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter is equipped with an integrated ramp-up detection function. If it
detects a motor startup, the motor voltage is immediately increased to 100 % of the mains
voltage. The internal bypass contacts close and the thyristors are bridged.
0RWRUFXUUHQW
,
,'LUHFW
RQOLQH
VWDUWLQJ
PRWRU
,6RIWVWDUWHU
DGMXVWDEOHFXUUHQW
OLPLWYDOXH
%HJLQQLQJGHWHU
PLQHGE\VSHFLILHG
VWDUWLQJPRGHLQWKLV
FDVHYROWDJHUDPS
0RWRUUXQXS
UHFRJQL]HG
E\SDVVFRQWDFWV
FORVH
,H0RWRU
QH0RWRU
Figure 5-4
0RWRUVSHHG
Q
Current limiting with soft starter
Typical applications for current limiting
Current limiting is used for applications with large centrifugal masses (mass inertias) and
therefore longer ramp-up times, e.g. fans, circular saws etc.
5.2
Stop modes
You can choose between different stop modes reflecting the wide range of applications for
SIRIUS soft starters. The motor stop can be optimally adapted to each particular application.
If a start command is issued during the stop process, the process is interrupted and the motor
is started again with the set start mode.
Note
If you select "soft stop" (3RW40 only) as the stop mode, the feeder (soft starter, cables,
feeder protective devices, and motor) may need to be dimensioned for higher values
because the current exceeds the rated motor current during the stop process.
30
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.2 Stop modes
0RWRU
VSHHG
Q
QH
1 Q&RDVWLQJGRZQ
2 Q7RUTXHFRQWUROOHG
6WRSFRPPDQG
DWVRIWVWDUWHU
7LPHW
V
VWRSSLQJPRGH
5.2.1
Stop without load (3RW30 and 3RW40)
"Stop without load" means the power supplied to the motor via the soft starter is interrupted
when the ON command is removed from the starter. The motor coasts to a standstill, driven
only by the mass inertia (centrifugal mass) of the rotor and load. This is also referred to as a
natural stop. A large centrifugal mass means a longer stop time without load.
Typical applications for stop without load
Stop without load is used for loads that place no special demands on the startup
characteristic, e.g. fans.
5.2.2
Soft stop (3RW40 only)
In "soft stop" mode, the natural stop process of the load is decelerated. The function is used
when the load must be prevented from stopping abruptly. This is typically the case in
applications with a low mass inertia or a high counter-torque.
Ramp-down time
The "Ramp-down time" potentiometer on the soft starter allows you to specify how long power
should still be supplied to the motor after the ON command is removed. The torque generated
in the motor is reduced by means of a voltage ramp function within this ramp-down time and
the application stops smoothly.
If the motor is stopped abruptly in pump applications, as is normal with wye-delta or direct
starting, for instance, water hammer can occur. Water hammer is caused by the sudden flow
separation, leading to pressure fluctuations on the pump. It has the effect of producing noise
and mechanical impacts on the pipelines as well as on any flaps and valves installed there.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
31
Functions
5.3 Motor protection / intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only)
Water hammer can be reduced compared to direct or wye-delta starting by using the SIRIUS
3RW40 soft starter. An optimum pump stop is achieved using a SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter
with an integrated pump stop function (refer to chapter Comparison of device functions [Page
24]).
0RWRU
WRUTXH
0
01RPLQDO
RSHUDWLRQ
6WRSSLQJWLPH
7LPHW
V
6WRSFRPPDQG
DWVRIWVWDUWHU
Typical applications for soft stop
Use soft stop for
5.3
•
Pumps to reduce water hammer.
•
Conveyor belts to prevent the conveyed product from tilting.
Motor protection / intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only)
NOTICE
If the soft starter is disconnected because the motor overload protection or the intrinsic
device protection trips, you must wait a defined cooling time (recovery time) prior to
acknowledging the fault or starting the motor again. (Motor overload tripping time: 60
seconds, temperature sensor: after cooling, intrinsic device protection tripping time: >
30 seconds)
5.3.1
Motor protection function
The motor overload protection function is implemented on the basis of the winding
temperature. This indicates whether the motor is overloaded or functioning in the normal
operating range.
The winding temperature can either be calculated with the help of the integrated, electronic
motor overload function or measured with a connected motor thermistor.
32
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.3 Motor protection / intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only)
The two types of protection must be combined to achieve full motor protection. This
combination is recommended to protect the motor optimally.
Note
Thermistor motor protection evaluation
The thermistor motor protection evaluation function is optionally available for the SIRIUS
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 soft starters in the 24 V AC/DC control voltage version.
Motor overload protection
The current flow during motor operation is measured by measuring the current with
transformers integrated in the soft starter. The temperature rise in the winding is calculated
based on the rated operational current set for the motor.
A trip is generated by the soft starter when the characteristic is reached, depending on the trip
class (CLASS setting).
ATEX
"Increased safety" type of protection EEx e acc. to ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter sizes S0 to S12 are suitable for starting explosion-proof
motors with the "increased safety" type of protection EEx e (type of protection / marking: Ex II
(2) GD).
Wire the fault output (95 96) to an upstream switching device in such a way that if a fault
occurs, this device disconnects the feeder (refer to Fig. "3RW40 wiring fault with 3RV").
//
1/
)
21
57
4
5:
$ $ ,1
5:
0
a
Figure 5-5
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
$
4
$
3RW40 wiring fault
33
Functions
5.3 Motor protection / intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only)
//
1/
21
4
,!
59
5:
$ $ ,1
5:
0
a
Figure 5-6
'
8
'
3RW40 wiring fault with 3RV
4
For further information, refer to the operating instructions, Order No. 3ZX1012-0RW40-1CA1
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/22809303).
WARNING
Danger of death or serious injury.
The 3RW40 is not suitable for installation in hazardous areas. The device is only allowed to
be installed in a control cabinet with the IP4x degree of protection. Appropriate measures
(e.g. encapsulation) must be taken if it is to be installed in a hazardous area.
Trip class (electronic overload protection)
The trip class (CLASS) specifies the maximum time within which a protective device must trip
from a cold state at 7.2 x the rated operational current (motor protection to IEC 60947). The
tripping characteristics represent this time as a function of the tripping current (refer to
chapter Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW40 (with symmetry) [Page 161]).
You can set different CLASS characteristics according to the startup class.
Note
The rated data of the soft starters refers to normal starting (CLASS 10). The starters may
need to be calculated with a size allowance for heavy-duty starting (> CLASS 10). You can
only set a rated motor current that is lower than the soft starter rated current (for the
permissible settings, refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121]).
Recovery time (motor overload protection)
A recovery time of 60 seconds, during which the motor cools down and cannot be restarted,
starts if the thermal motor model is tripped.
34
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.3 Motor protection / intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only)
Protection against voltage failure in the event of a fault
If the control supply voltage fails during a trip, the current tripping state of the thermal motor
model and the current recovery time are stored in the soft starter. When the control supply
voltage is restored, the current tripping state of the thermal motor model and the intrinsic
device protection prior to the power failure are likewise automatically restored. If the control
voltage is disconnected during operation (without a preceding fault trip), the starter is not
protected against voltage failure.
Temperature sensor
Note
Temperature sensor
The temperature sensor evaluation function is optionally available for the SIRIUS 3RW40 24
to 3RW40 47 soft starters in the 24 V AC/DC control voltage version.
This motor protection function measures the motor's stator winding temperature directly with
the help of a sensor installed in the motor, in other words the motor must have a sensor
wound into the stator winding.
You can choose between two different sensor types for the evaluation.
1. Type A PTC thermistors ("type A sensors") for connection to terminals T11/21 and T12
2. Thermoclick sensors for connection to terminals T11/21 and T22
The wiring and sensors are monitored for wire breakage and short-circuits.
Recovery time (thermistor motor protection)
If the thermistor motor protection is tripped, the soft starter cannot be restarted until the
sensor installed in the motor has cooled down. The recovery time varies according to the
temperature state of the sensor.
5.3.2
Intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only)
Thyristor protection (thermal)
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters are equipped with integrated intrinsic device protection to
prevent thermal overloading of the thyristors.
This is achieved on the one hand by means of current measuring transformers in the three
phases and on the other, by measuring the temperature with temperature sensors on the
thyristor's heat sink.
If the fixed, internally set trip value is exceeded, the soft starter is automatically disconnected.
Recovery time (intrinsic device protection)
If the intrinsic device protection is tripped, the soft starter cannot be restarted until a recovery
time of at least 30 seconds has elapsed.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
35
Functions
5.4 Functions of the RESET buttons
Thyristor protection (short-circuit)
SITOR semiconductor fuses must be connected upstream to protect the thyristors against
short-circuits (e.g. in case of cable damage or an interturn fault in the motor; refer to chapter
Soft starter assembly with type of coordination 2 [Page 61]). For the fuse selection tables,
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
Protection against voltage failure (in the event of a fault)
If the control supply voltage fails during a trip, the current tripping state of the thermal intrinsic
device protection model and the current recovery time are stored in the soft starter. When the
control supply voltage is restored, the current tripping state of the thermal intrinsic device
protection prior to the power failure are likewise automatically restored.
NOTICE
If the control voltage is disconnected during operation (e.g. in "automatic mode"), the starter
is not protected against voltage failure. You must wait five minutes between two starts to
ensure that the motor protection and the intrinsic device protection are working correctly.
5.4
Functions of the RESET buttons
5.4.1
SIRIUS 3RW40 2, 3RW40 3, and 3RW40 4 soft starters
5.4.1.1
RESET MODE button and LED
By pressing the RESET MODE button, you define the reset procedure in case of a fault. This
is indicated by the RESET MODE LED.
Yellow = AUTO
Off = MANUAL
Green = REMOTE
Note
On the SIRIUS 3RW40 2. soft starter, the RESET MODE button is located underneath the
label (refer to chapter Operator controls, displays, and connections on the 3RW40 [Page 70])
36
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.4 Functions of the RESET buttons
5.4.1.2
Manual RESET
Manual RESET with the RESET / TEST button (RESET MODE LED = off)
You can reset a fault by pressing the RESET / TEST button.
5.4.1.3
Remote RESET
Remote RESET (RESET MODE LED = green)
You can reset a fault signal by disconnecting the control supply voltage for >1.5 s.
1/ //
5(6(7
212))
8V
$ $ ! V
W
5.4.1.4
AUTO RESET
AUTO RESET (RESET MODE LED = yellow)
If you set the RESET mode to AUTO, a fault is automatically reset as follows:
•
If the motor overload protection function trips: after 60 s
•
If the intrinsic device protection function trips: after 30 s
•
If the thermistor evaluation function trips: after the temperature sensor in the motor has
cooled down
WARNING
Automatic restart
Danger of death, serious injury, or property damage.
The automatic RESET mode (AUTO RESET) must not be used in applications where
there is a risk of serious injury to persons or substantial damage to property if the motor
starts up again unexpectedly. The start command (e.g. issued by a contact or the PLC)
must be reset prior to issuing a RESET command because the motor attempts to restart
again automatically following this RESET command if a start command is still present.
This particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are
advised to integrate the group fault output (terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
5.4.1.5
Acknowledging faults
For information about whether or not faults can be acknowledged as well as the
corresponding LED and output contact states, refer to chapter Diagnostics and fault signals
[Page 44].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
37
Functions
5.4 Functions of the RESET buttons
5.4.2
SIRIUS 3RW40 5 and 3RW40 7 soft starters
5.4.2.1
RESET MODE button and AUTO LED
By pressing the RESET MODE button, you define the reset procedure in case of a fault. This
is indicated by the AUTO LED.
Yellow = AUTO
Off = MANUAL (REMOTE)
5.4.2.2
Manual RESET
Manual RESET with the RESET / TEST button (AUTO LED = off)
You can reset a fault by pressing the RESET / TEST button.
5.4.2.3
Remote RESET
Remote RESET (AUTO LED = green)
You can initiate a remote RESET by controlling the optional module for RESET (3RU19002A).
1
/ / /
)
1
/
)
7HVW 5HVHW
6
VHF
8 9:
0
38
0
a
(
(
58$)HUQUHVHW5HPRWH5HVHW
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.4 Functions of the RESET buttons
5.4.2.4
AUTO RESET
AUTO RESET (AUTO LED = yellow)
If you set the RESET mode to AUTO, a fault is automatically reset as follows:
•
If the motor overload protection function trips: after 60 s
•
If the intrinsic device protection function trips: after 30 s
WARNING
Automatic restart
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The automatic RESET mode (AUTO RESET) must not be used in applications where
there is a risk of serious injury to persons or substantial damage to property if the motor
starts up again unexpectedly. The start command (e.g. issued by a contact or the PLC)
must be reset prior to issuing a RESET command because the motor attempts to restart
again automatically following this RESET command if a start command is still present.
This particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are
advised to integrate the group fault output (terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
5.4.2.5
Acknowledging faults
For information about whether or not faults can be acknowledged as well as the
corresponding LED and output contact states, refer to chapter Diagnostics and fault signals
[Page 44].
5.4.3
Other functions of the RESET button
5.4.3.1
Motor protection trip test
You initiate a motor overload trip by pressing the RESET / TEST button for longer than five
seconds. The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter is tripped by the fault signal at the OVERLOAD
LED, the FAILURE / OVERLOAD contact 95-98 closes, and the motor that is connected and
running is switched off.
RESET / TEST button on the 3RW40 2,
3RW40 3, and 3RW40 4
5.4.3.2
RESET / TEST button on the 3RW40 5 and
3RW40 7
Reparameterizing the ON / RUN output contact
For information about reparameterizing the output with the RESET / TEST button, refer to
chapter Parameterizing the 3RW40 outputs [Page 110] .
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
39
Functions
5.5 Functions of the inputs
5.5
Functions of the inputs
5.5.1
Start input (terminal 1) on 3RW30 and 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4
Rated control voltage is present at terminal A1 / A2: The startup process of the soft starter
begins when a signal is present at terminal 1 (IN). The starter operates until the signal is
removed again.
If a ramp-down time is parameterized (3RW40 only), a soft stop starts as soon as the signal is
removed.
The potential of the signal at terminal 1 must correspond to the potential of the rated control
voltage at terminal A1 / A2.
For recommended circuits, e.g. control by means of pushbuttons, contactor contacts, or a
PLC, refer to chapter Typical circuit diagrams [Page 167].
5.5.2
Start input (terminal 3) on 3RW40 5 and 3RW40 7
Rated control voltage is present at terminal A1 / A2: The startup process of the soft starter
begins when a signal is present at terminal 3 (IN). The starter operates until the signal is
removed again. If a ramp-down time is parameterized, a soft stop starts as soon as the signal
is removed.
The 24 V DC control voltage supplied by the soft starter must be taken from terminal 1 (+) as
voltage for the signal at terminal 3.
If you select direct control by a PLC, the "M" of the PLC's reference potential must be
connected to terminal 2 (-).
$
$
9
+]
GFFG ,1
9
For recommended circuits, e.g. control by means of pushbuttons, contactor contacts, or a
PLC, refer to chapter Typical circuit diagrams [Page 167].
40
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.6 Functions of the outputs
5.5.3
Thermistor input / connection on 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4
24 V AC/DC rated control voltage
After removing the copper jumper between T11/21 and T22, you can connect and evaluate
either a Klixon thermistor integrated in the motor winding (at terminal T11/T21-T22) or a type
A PTC (at terminal T11/T21-T12).
T11/T21
T11/T21 T12 T22
ϑ
ϑ
Klixon
5.6
Functions of the outputs
5.6.1
3RW30: Output terminal 13 / 14 ON
T12 T22
Type A PTC
The potential-free output contact at terminal 13/14 (ON) closes if a signal is present at
terminal 1 (IN); it remains closed until the start command is removed.
The output can be used, for instance, to control a line contactor connected upstream or to
implement latching if you selected pushbutton control. For recommended circuits, refer to
chapter Typical circuit diagrams [Page 167].
IN
1
tR on
UN
t
U
US
tR on
ON
13/14
tR on
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
t
t
41
Functions
5.6 Functions of the outputs
For a state diagram of the contact in the various operating states, refer to chapter Diagnostics
and fault signals [Page 44].
5.6.2
3RW40: Output terminals 13 / 14 ON / RUN and 23 / 24 BYPASSED
ON
The potential-free output contact at terminal 13/14 (ON) closes if a signal is present at
terminal 1 (IN); it remains closed until the start command is removed (factory default). The ON
function can be used, for instance, as a latching contact if you selected pushbutton control.
Reparameterizing from ON to RUN
You can reparameterize the function of the ON output on the 3RW40 to RUN by
simultaneously pressing the RESET TEST and RESET MODE buttons (refer to chapter
Commissioning the 3RW40 [Page 98]).
RUN
The RUN output remains closed as long as the motor is controlled by the soft starter, in other
words during the startup phase, in bypass mode, and during the soft stop (if set). This output
function can be used, for instance, if a line contactor connected upstream must be controlled
by the soft starter, especially if the soft stop function is set.
BYPASSED
The BYPASSED function can be used, for instance, to indicate that the motor has started up
successfully.
The BYPASSED output at terminal 23 / 24 closes as soon as the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter
detects that the motor has started up (refer to chapter Ramp-up detection [Page 104]).
The integral bypass contacts simultaneously close and the thyristors are bridged. The integral
bypass contacts and output 23 / 24 open again as soon as the start input IN is removed.
42
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.6 Functions of the outputs
IN
13/14
tR on
UN
tR off
t
tR off
t
tR off
t
U
US
tR on
ON 13/14
RUN 13/14
BYPASSED 23/24
tR on
For a state diagram of the contacts and the LEDs in the various operating and fault states,
refer to chapter Diagnostics and fault signals [Page 44].
For recommended circuits, refer to chapter Typical circuit diagrams [Page 167].
5.6.3
3RW40: Group fault output at terminal 95 / 96 / 98 OVERLOAD / FAILURE
If there is no rated control voltage or if a failure occurs, the potential-free FAILURE /
OVERLOAD output is switched.
For recommended circuits, refer to chapter Typical circuit diagrams [Page 167].
For a state diagram of the contacts in the various fault and operating states, refer to chapter
Diagnostics and fault signals [Page 44].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
43
Functions
5.7 Diagnostics and fault signals
5.7
Diagnostics and fault signals
5.7.1
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting
/('VRQ5:
6RIWVWDUWHU
'(9,&(
UGJQ\OZ
5:
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFW
67$7(%<3$66('
)$,/85(
JQUG
21
8V 2SHUDWLQJVWDWH
,1
2II
JQ
6WDUW
JQ
%\SDVVHG
JQ
JQ
JQ
)DXOW
,PSHUPLVVLEOHHOHFWURQLFVVXSSO\
YROWDJH
%\SDVVRYHUORDG
UG
0LVVLQJORDGYROWDJH
3KDVHIDLOXUHPLVVLQJORDG
'HYLFHIDXOW
\OZ
UG
JQ
UG
UG
UG
/('V
2II
21
)ODVKLQJ
JQ
UG
\OZ
*UHHQ
5HG
<HOORZ
1) The fault is automatically reset by an outgoing event. An automatic restart is initiated and
the 3RW restarted if a start command is present at the input.
WARNING
Automatic restart
Danger of death, serious injury, or property damage.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
2) The fault can be acknowledged by removing the start command at the start input.
3) Switch off the control voltage, then switch it on again. If the fault is still present, contact
your SIEMENS partner or Technical Assistance.
For notes on troubleshooting, refer to the table below.
44
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.7 Diagnostics and fault signals
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Impermissible electronics supply
voltage
The control supply voltage does not
correspond to the soft starter's rated
voltage.
Check the control supply voltage; an
incorrect control supply voltage could be
caused by a power failure or a voltage
dip.
Bypass overload
A current > 3.5 x Ie of the soft starter
occurs for > 60 ms in bypass mode (e.g.
because the motor is blocked).
Check the motor and load, and check the
soft starter's dimensions.
Missing load voltage, phase failure
/ missing load
Cause 1: Phase L1 / L2 / L3 is missing or
fails / collapses when the motor is
operating.
Connect L1 / L2 / L3 or correct the voltage
dip.
Tripped as a result of a dip in the
permissible rated operational voltage >
15 % for > 100 ms during the startup
process or > 200 ms in bypass mode.
Device fault
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Cause 2: The motor that is connected is
too small and the fault occurs as soon as
it is switched to bypass mode.
If less than 10 % of the soft starter's rated
current is flowing, the motor cannot be
operated with soft starter. Use another
soft starter.
Cause 3: Motor phase T1 / T2 / T3 is not
connected.
Connect the motor properly (e.g. jumpers
in the motor terminal box, repair switch
closed etc.)
Soft starter defective.
Contact your SIEMENS partner or
Technical Assistance.
45
Functions
5.7 Diagnostics and fault signals
5.7.2
3RW40: LEDs and troubleshooting
/('VRQ5:
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFWV
6RIWVWDUWHU
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ
67$7(
5(6(7
02'(
%<3$66('
29(5/2$' $872
'(9,&(
)$,/85(
UG
\OZJQ
UGJQ\OZ JQUG
5:
21
581
)$,/85(
%<3$66(' 29(5/2$'
8V 2SHUDWLQJVWDWH
,1
2II
JQ
6WDUW
JQ
JQ
%\SDVVHG
JQ
JQ
6WRS
JQ
JQ
:DUQLQJ
,HLPSHUPLVVLEOH&/$66VHWWLQJ
JQ
6WDUWLQKLELWHGGHYLFHWRRKRWFRROLQJWLPH PD\YDU\DFFRUGLQJWRWK\ULVWRUWHPSHUDWXUH
JQ JQ
\OZ
)DXOW
,PSHUPLVVLEOHHOHFWURQLFVVXSSO\
YROWDJH
UG
,PSHUPLVVLEOH,H&/$66VHWWLQJDQG,1
!
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQWULSSLQJRYHUORDGUHOD\ FRROLQJWLPHVWKHUPLVWRUFRROLQJWLPH
PD\YDU\DFFRUGLQJWRPRWRUWHPSHUDWXUH
7KHUPLVWRUPRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
:LUHEUHDNDJHVKRUWFLUFXLW
JQ
UG
JQ
JQ
7KHUPDORYHUORDGRQGHYLFH
FRROLQJWLPH!V
\OZ
UG
0LVVLQJORDGYROWDJH
3KDVHIDLOXUHPLVVLQJORDG
JQ
UG
'HYLFHIDXOWFDQQRWEHDFNQRZOHGJHG
GHYLFHGHIHFWLYH
UG
UG
7HVWIXQFWLRQ
3UHVV7(67W!V
UG
JQ
5(6(702'(SUHVVWRFKDQJH
0DQXDO5(6(7
$XWR5(6(7
\OZ
5HPRWH5(6(7
JQ
2SWLRQDO5:WR5:LQ9$&'&RQO\
/('V
JQ
2II
46
21
)ODVKLQJ
\OZ
UG
)OLFNHULQJ *UHHQ <HOORZ 5HG
$XWRPDWLFDOO\UHVHWLIWKHVHWWLQJLVFRUUHFWHGRUZKHQWKHV\VWHPUHWXUQVWRQRUPDO
0XVWEHDFNQRZOHGJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHVHOHFWHG5(6(7PRGH 0RWRUSURWHFWLRQWULSWHVW
'HYLFHIDXOWFDQQRWEHDFNQRZOHGJHG&RQWDFW\RXU6,(0(16SDUWQHURU7HFKQLFDO$VVLVWDQFH
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.7 Diagnostics and fault signals
WARNING
Automatic restart
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The automatic RESET mode (AUTO RESET) must not be used in applications where there is
a risk of serious injury to persons or substantial damage to property if the motor starts up
again unexpectedly. The start command (e.g. issued by a contact or the PLC) must be reset
prior to issuing a RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again
automatically following this RESET command if a start command is still present. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to
integrate the group fault output on the 3RW40 (terminals 95 and 96), or the signaling contact
of the motor or miniature circuit breaker on all devices, in the controller.
Notes on troubleshooting
Warning
Cause
Remedy
Impermissible Ie CLASS setting
(control voltage present, no start
command)
The rated operational current Ie set for
the motor (control voltage present, no
start command) exceeds the associated,
maximum permissible setting current
referred to the selected CLASS setting
(chapter Motor current settings [Page
107]).
Check the rated operational current set
for the motor, select a lower CLASS
setting, or calculate the soft starter with a
size allowance.
Start inhibited, device too hot
The acknowledgment and the motor start
are inhibited for a defined time by the
inherent device protection following an
overload trip, to allow the 3RW40 to cool
down.
Possible causes
•
•
•
•
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Too many starts,
Motor ramp-up time too long,
Ambient temperature in switching
device's environment too high,
Minimum installation clearances not
complied with.
As long as the 3RW40 is not controlled
IN (0->1), this is only a status signal.
However, it becomes a fault signal if the
start command is applied.
The device cannot be started until the
temperature of the thyristor or the heat
sink has cooled down enough to
guarantee sufficient reserve for a
successful startup. The time until
restarting is allowed can vary but is a
minimum of 30 s.
Rectify the causes and possibly retrofit
the optional fan (3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.).
47
Functions
5.7 Diagnostics and fault signals
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Impermissible electronics supply
voltage:
The control supply voltage does not
correspond to the soft starter's rated
voltage.
Check the control supply voltage; could
be caused by a power failure, voltage dip,
or incorrect control supply voltage. Use a
stabilized power supply unit if due to
mains fluctuations.
Impermissible Ie/CLASS setting
and IN (0->1)
(control voltage present, IN start
command changes from 0 to 1)
The rated operational current Ie set for
the motor (control voltage present, start
command present) exceeds the
associated, maximum permissible setting
current referred to the selected CLASS
setting (chapter Motor current settings
[Page 107]).
Check the rated operational current set
for the motor, select a lower CLASS
setting, or calculate the soft starter with a
size allowance.
For the maximum permissible settings,
refer to chapter "Technical data [Page
121]".
Motor protection tripping Overload
relay / thermistor:
The thermal motor model has tripped.
After an overload trip, restarting is
inhibited until the recovery time has
elapsed.
- Overload relay tripping time: 60 s
- Thermistor tripping time: When the
temperature sensor (thermistor) in the
motor has cooled down.
- Check whether the motor's rated
operational current Ie is set correctly, or
- Change the CLASS setting, or
- Possibly reduce the switching frequency,
or
- Deactivate the motor protection (CLASS
OFF), or
- Check the motor and the application.
Thermistor protection: wire
breakage / short-circuit (optional for
3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4. devices):
Temperature sensor at terminals T11/
T12/T22 is short-circuited or defective, a
cable is not connected, or no sensor is
connected.
Check the temperature sensor and the
wiring
Thermal overload on the device:
Overload trip of the thermal model for the
power unit of the 3RW40
Wait until the device has cooled down
again, possibly increase the current
limiting value set for starting, or reduce
the switching frequency (too many
consecutive starts). Possibly retrofit the
optional fan (3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.).
Possible causes
•
•
•
•
48
Too many starts,
Motor ramp-up time too long,
Ambient temperature in switching
device's environment too high,
Minimum installation clearances not
complied with.
Check the load and the motor, check
whether the ambient temperature in the
soft starter's environment is too high
(derating above 40 °C, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]), comply with
the minimum clearances.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Functions
5.7 Diagnostics and fault signals
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Missing load voltage, phase failure
/ missing load:
Cause 1: Phase L1 / L2 / L3 is missing or
fails / collapses when the motor is
operating.
Connect L1 / L2 / L3 or correct the voltage
dip.
Tripped as a result of a dip in the
permissible rated operational voltage >
15 % for > 100 ms during the startup
process or > 200 ms in bypass mode.
Device fault
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Cause 2: The motor that is connected is
too small and the fault occurs as soon as
it is switched to bypass mode.
Set the correct rated operational current
for the connected motor or set it to the
minimum value (if the motor current is
less than 10 % of the set Ie, the motor
cannot be operated with this starter).
Cause 3: Motor phase T1 / T2 / T3 is not
connected.
Connect the motor properly (e.g. jumpers
in the motor terminal box, repair switch
closed etc.)
Soft starter defective.
Contact your SIEMENS partner or
Technical Assistance.
49
Functions
5.7 Diagnostics and fault signals
50
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Application planning
6.1
Application examples
6.1.1
Roller conveyor application
6
Using the 3RW30 with roller conveyors
Roller conveyors are employed, for example, in parcel distribution systems for transporting
parcels to and from individual workstations. For this purpose, the direction of rotation of the 11
kW / 15 hp motor that is used has to be adjustable in order for the conveyor to work in both
directions.
The following requirements must be met by the roller conveyor:
•
The roller conveyor has to start smoothly, to prevent damage to the transported goods due
to slipping or tilting.
•
The machine's wear and maintenance intervals should be minimized, which is why
slippage of the belt drive during startup must be prevented.
•
The high current load upon motor startup must be reduced by means of a voltage ramp.
•
The feeder assembly should be as small as possible so as not to exceed the control
cabinet's space capacity.
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter offers the following advantages:
•
The roller conveyor is rapidly accelerated to the nominal speed without torque surges
thanks to the optimum setting of the voltage ramp during startup.
•
The motor's starting current is reduced.
•
Reversing operation of the conveyor belt is realized through contactor interconnection with
SIRIUS 3RA13 reversing contactor combinations.
•
The feeder and the motor protection are implemented with SIRIUS 3RV motor starter
protectors.
•
The use of SIRIUS system components guarantees maximum wiring reductions and
space savings.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
51
Application planning
6.1 Application examples
6.1.2
Hydraulic pump application
Using the 3RW40 with hydraulic pumps
The SIRIUS 3RW40 is optimally suited for soft starting and stopping of hydraulic pumps. With
a rating of 200 kW / 250 hp, this soft starter is used, for example, in the production of sheet
parts to drive the presses.
The drives for hydraulic pumps must meet the following requirements:
•
The motor's starting current has to be reduced to minimize the load on the higher-level
mains transformer during startup.
•
Integrated motor protection is called for to reduce wiring expenditure and space
requirements in the control box.
•
The hydraulic pump must be started and stopped in a soft manner to minimize the
mechanical load on the drive and the pump caused by torque surges during starting and
stopping.
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter offers the following advantages:
52
•
The settable current limiting of the SIRIUS 3RW40 limits the load on the mains transformer
during the motor startup.
•
Motor protection is ensured by the motor overload relay with settable tripping times
integrated in the soft starter.
•
The adjustable voltage ramp ensures that the hydraulic pump is started and stopped
without torque surges.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
7
Installation
7.1
Installing the soft starter
7.1.1
Unpacking
CAUTION
Do not lift the device by the cover in order to unpack it, especially sizes 3RW40 55 to
3RW40 76, because this could lead to damage.
Permissible mounting position
3RW30
3RW40
10°
10°
10°
Vertical mounting
NSB0_01897
10°
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 (with optional additional fan)
3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7
90˚
90˚
NSB00649
7.1.2
Horizontal mounting
NOTICE
The permissible switching frequency values can vary according to the selected mounting
position. For information about factors and how to determine the new switching frequency,
refer to chapter Configuration [Page 73].
Note
An optional fan can be ordered for the 3RW40 24 to 3RW40 47 sizes; this fan is integrated in
the device for 3RW40 55 to 3RW40 76. The 3RW30 cannot be equipped with a fan.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
53
Installation
7.1 Installing the soft starter
7.1.3
Mounting dimensions, clearances, and assembly type
The minimum clearances from other devices must be complied with to ensure unobstructed
cooling as well as the free supply and discharge of air to and from the heat sink.
E
11
3
5
a
a
2
4
6
F
Figure 7-1
Clearances from other devices
MLFB
a (mm)
a (in)
b (mm)
b (in)
c (mm)
c (in)
3RW30 1./3RW30 2.
15
0.59
60
2.36
40
1.56
3RW30 3./3RW30 4
30
1.18
60
2.36
40
1.56
3RW40 2.
15
0.59
60
2.36
40
1.56
3RW40 3./3RW40 4.
30
1.18
60
2.36
40
1.56
3RW40 5./3RW40 7.
5
0.2
100
4
75
3
NOTICE
Allow sufficient clearances for the cooling air to circulate freely. The device is ventilated from
bottom to top.
54
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Installation
7.1 Installing the soft starter
7.1.4
Assembly type: Standalone assembly, side-by-side assembly, direct mounting
Standalone assembly
The term "standalone assembly" is used if the clearances a / b / c described in chapter
Mounting dimensions, clearances, and assembly type [Page 54] are complied with.
Side-by-side assembly
The term "side-by-side assembly" is used if the lateral clearance a described in chapter
Mounting dimensions, clearances, and assembly type [Page 54] are not complied with, e.g. if
several switching devices are assembled side by side.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
55
Installation
7.1 Installing the soft starter
Direct mounting
The term "direct mounting" is used if the top clearance b described in chapter Mounting
dimensions, clearances, and assembly type [Page 54] is not complied with, e.g. if the soft
starter is mounted directly on a motor starter protector (e.g. 3RV2) using a link module (e.g.
3RV29).
NOTICE
The permissible switching frequency values can vary according to the selected assembly
type. For information about factors and how to determine the new switching frequency, refer
to chapter Configuration [Page 73].
7.1.5
Installation requirements
Degree of protection IP00
The SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40 soft starters conform to the IP00 degree of protection.
The devices must be installed in control cabinets with the IP54 degree of protection (pollution
degree 2), taking account of the ambient conditions.
Make sure no liquids, dust, or conductive objects can get inside the soft starter. The soft
starter produces waste heat (power loss) while it is operating (refer to chapter Technical data
[Page 121]).
CAUTION
Provide adequate cooling at the place of installation to prevent the switching device from
overheating.
56
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Installation / mounting
8.1
8
General information
General information
A motor feeder comprises a disconnector, a contact, and a motor as a minimum.
Line protection against short-circuits must be implemented, together with overload protection
for the line and motor.
Disconnector
The isolating function with line protection against overload and short-circuits can be achieved
with a motor starter protector or a fuse disconnector, for instance. The motor overload
protection function is integrated in the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter. The motor overload
protection for the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter can be implemented with a motor circuit breaker,
for instance, or using a motor overload relay in conjunction with a contactor (for the fuse and
motor starter protector assignment, refer to Technical data [Page 121]).
Contact
The contact function is taken care of by the SIRIUS 3RW30 or 3RW40 soft starter.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage
Danger of death or serious injury.
If mains voltage is present at the input terminals of the soft starter, hazardous voltage may
still be present at the soft starter output even if a start command has not been issued. This
voltage must be isolated by means of a disconnector (open isolating distance, e.g. with an
open switch disconnector) whenever work is carried out on the feeder (refer to chapter Five
safety rules for work in or on electrical systems [Page 58]).
Note
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses, motor starter protectors, and switching
devices) must be dimensioned for direct starting and according to the on-site short-circuit
conditions, and ordered separately.
For recommended fuse and motor starter protector ratings for the feeder with soft starter,
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
57
Installation / mounting
8.2 Five safety rules for work in or on electrical systems
8.2
Five safety rules for work in or on electrical systems
A set of rules, which are summarized in DIN VDE 0105 as the "five safety rules", are defined
for work in or on electrical systems as a preventative measure against electrical accidents:
1. Isolate
2. Secure against switching on again
3. Verify that the equipment is not live
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Erect barriers around or cover adjacent live parts
These five safety rules must be applied in the above order prior to starting work on an
electrical system. After completing the work, proceed in the reverse order.
It is assumed that every electrician is familiar with these rules.
Explanations
1. The isolating distances between live and deenergized parts of the system must vary
according to the operating voltage that is applied.
"Isolate" refers to the all-pole disconnection of live parts.
All-pole disconnection can be achieved, e.g. by.:
- Switching off the miniature circuit breaker
- Switching off the motor circuit breaker
- Unscrewing fusible links
- Removing LV HRC fuses
2. The feeder must be secured against inadvertent restarting to ensure that it remains
isolated for the duration of the work. This can be achieved, for instance, by securing the
motor and miniature circuit breakers with lockable blocking elements in the disconnected
state, either using a lock or by unscrewing the fuses.
3. The deenergized state of the equipment should be verified using suitable test equipment,
e.g. a two-pole voltmeter. Single-pole test pins are not suitable for this purpose. The
absence of power must be established for all poles, phase to phase, and phase to N/PE.
4. Grounding and short-circuiting are only mandatory if the system has a nominal voltage
greater than 1 kV. In this case, the system should always be grounded first and then
connected to the live parts to be short-circuited.
5. These parts should be covered, or barriers erected around them, to avoid accidental
contact during the work with adjacent parts that are still live.
58
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Installation / mounting
8.3 General feeder assembly (type of coordination 1)
8.3
General feeder assembly (type of coordination 1)
The SIRIUS 3RW30 or 3RW40 soft starter is connected into the motor feeder between the
motor starter protector and the motor.
L1
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L2
L3
PE
4
4
0
8
9
:
8
9
:
:
8
9
:
8
9
Figure 8-1
Block diagram of the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter
Note
For the component design, refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
59
Installation / mounting
8.4 Soft starter with line contactor (type of coordination 1)
8.4
Soft starter with line contactor (type of coordination 1)
If electrical isolation is specified, you can install a motor contactor between the soft starter and
the motor starter protector.
L1
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L2
L3
PE
4
4
4
0
8
9
:
8
9
:
:
8
9
:
8
9
Figure 8-2
Block diagram of a feeder with an optional main / line contactor
Note
For the component design, refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
NOTICE
If a main or line contactor is used, it should not be connected between the soft starter and the
motor. The soft starter could otherwise indicate a "Missing load voltage" fault in case of a
start command and delayed connection of the contactor.
60
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Installation / mounting
8.5 Soft starter assembly with type of coordination 2
8.5
Soft starter assembly with type of coordination 2
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter has internal protection to prevent overloading of the
thyristors. The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter has no internal protection to prevent overloading of
the thyristors. The soft starter must always be dimensioned according to the duration of the
startup process and the desired starting frequency. If the feeder of the SIRIUS 3RW30 or
3RW40 soft starter is assembled accordingly with the feeder components recommended in
chapter Technical data [Page 121] (e.g. motor starter protector or LV HRC fuse), type of
coordination 1 is achieved. In order to achieve type of coordination 2, all thyristors must be
additionally protected against short-circuits by means of special semiconductor fuses (e.g.
SIEMENS SITOR). A short-circuit can occur, for instance, as a result of a defect in the motor
windings or in the motor's power supply cable.
L1
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L2
L3
PE
4
)
4
0
8
9
:
8
9
:
:
8
9
:
8
9
Figure 8-3
Block diagram of a feeder with semiconductor fuses
Note
For the component design, refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
61
Installation / mounting
8.6 Capacitors to improve the power factor
Note
Minimum and maximum configuration of the semiconductor fuses
The fuses for the minimum and maximum configuration are specified in chapter Technical
data [Page 121].
Minimum configuration: The fuse is optimized for the thyristor's I²t value.
If the thyristor is cold (ambient temperature) and the startup process lasts a maximum of 20 s
at 3.5 times the rated current of the device, the fuse does not trip.
Maximum configuration: The maximum current permitted for the thyristor can flow without the
fuse tripping.
The maximum configuration is recommended for heavy-duty starting.
CAUTION
Risk of property damage
Type of coordination 1 in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1:
The device is defective following a short-circuit failure and therefore unsuitable for further use
(personnel and equipment must not be put at risk).
Type of coordination 2 in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1:
The device is suitable for further use following a short-circuit failure (personnel and
equipment must not be put at risk).
The type of coordination only refers to soft starters in conjunction with the stipulated
protective device (motor starter protector / fuse), not to additional components in the feeder.
8.6
Capacitors to improve the power factor
CAUTION
No capacitors must be connected to the output terminals of the soft starter. If so, the soft
starter will be damaged.
Active filters, e.g. for power factor correction, must not be operated parallel to the motor
control device.
If capacitors are to be used to correct the power factor, they must be connected on the
device's line side. If an isolating or main contactor is used together with the electronic soft
starter, the capacitors must be disconnected from the soft starter when the contactor is open.
62
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Installation / mounting
8.7 Maximum cable length
8.7
Maximum cable length
The cable between the soft starter and the motor must not be more than 300 m long (3RW30
and 3RW40).
The voltage drop due to the length of the cable to the motor may need to be considered when
dimensioning the cable.
Cable lengths up to 500 m are permitted for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters (refer to the 3RW44
System Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
llisapi.dll?query=3RW44&func=cslib.cssearch&content=skm%2Fmain.asp&lang=de&siteid=c
sius&objaction=cssearch&searchinprim=0&nodeid0=20025979)).
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
63
Installation / mounting
8.7 Maximum cable length
64
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
9
Connecting
9.1
Electrical connection
9.1.1
Control and auxiliary terminals
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters can be supplied with two different connection
technologies:
9.1.2
•
Screw-type technology
•
Spring-loaded technology
Main circuit connection
SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters up to the 55 kW / 75 hp size at 400 V / 480 V are
designed with removable terminals at the main circuit connections.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
65
Connecting
9.1 Electrical connection
Sizes 3RW30 1. to 3RW30 4.
1L1, 3L2, 5L3
1 L1
A2
3 L2
1
A1
24V
5 L3
13
A2, A1, 1, 13, 14
14
NO
ON
IN
DEVICE
SIRIUS
STATE/BYPASSED
DEVICE
STATE/BYPASSED
FAILURE
FAILURE
5
10
t
0
20s
U
40
100%
3R W3026-1BB0 4
2 T1
4 T2
2T1, 4T2, 6T3
6 T3
Sizes 3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.
1L1, 3L2, 5L3
1 L1
3 L2
A1
1
110-230V
IN
A2
5 L3
13
14/24
A2, A1, 1, 13, 14/24, 23
23
OVERLOAD
RESET MODE
NO
ON/RUN
NO
BYPASSED
DEVICE
SIRIUS
OVERLOAD
DEVICE
RESET MODE
STATE/BYPASSED
STATE/BYPASSED
RESET/TEST
RESET /TEST
FAILURE
FAILURE
x Ie
I
5
1.3
5
10
t
RESET MODE
RESET MODE
20s
0
20
15
OFF
10
U
40
100%
CLASS
Ie
28
10
36
3RW40..-.BB..
95
95, 96, 98
66
3RW40..-.TB..
5
33
0
20s
t
25
23
T11/T21
38 A
T12
T22
95
96
98
3R W4028-1TB14
96
98
NC
NO
96
98
T11/T21, T12, T22, 95, 96, 98
T11/T21
T12
2 T1
T22
95
4 T2
6 T3
2T1, 4T2, 6T3
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Connecting
9.1 Electrical connection
Sizes 3RW40 5. and 3RW40 7.
Sizes 3RW40 5. and 3RW40 7. have busbar connections for the main circuit connection.
Box terminals can be retrofitted on these devices as optional accessories (refer to chapter
Accessories [Page 199]).
1L1, 3L2, 5L3
13, 14/24, 23, 95, 96, 98
A1, A2, 1, 2, 3
2T1, 4T2, 6T3
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
67
Connecting
9.1 Electrical connection
68
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
10
Operation
10.1
Operator controls, displays, and connections on the 3RW30
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
1
Operating voltage (three-phase mains voltage)
2
Control supply voltage
3
IN start input
4
ON output
5
DEVICE status LED
6
STATE / BYPASSED / FAILURE status LED
7
Ramp-up time
8
Starting voltage
9
Motor terminals
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
69
Operation
10.2 Operator controls, displays, and connections on the 3RW40
10.2
Operator controls, displays, and connections on the 3RW40
1
2
4
3
5
7
6
9
8
10
18
11
13
12
14
16
15
70
17
1
Operating voltage (three-phase mains voltage)
2
Control supply voltage
3
IN start input
4
ON / RUN output
5
BYPASSED output
6
DEVICE / STATE / BYPASSED / FAILURE status LEDs
7
OVERLOAD, RESET MODE status LEDs
8
TEST / RESET button
9
Current limiting
10
Ramp-up time
11
Starting voltage
12
Ramp-down time
13
Trip class
14
Motor current
15
Thermistor input (can be optionally ordered with 24 V AC/DC control voltage for 3RW40 2. to
3RW40 4. devices)
16
Fault output
17
Motor terminals
18
RESET MODE button (behind the label on the 3RW40 2., refer to the diagram below)
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
RW-01200
Operation
10.2 Operator controls, displays, and connections on the 3RW40
1
2
3RW40 2...
Figure 10-1
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
3
RESET MODE
Button for setting RESET MODE behind the label
71
Operation
10.2 Operator controls, displays, and connections on the 3RW40
72
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.1
11
Configuration in general
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 electronic soft starters are designed for normal starting. A
larger size may need to be selected for longer ramp-up times or a higher starting frequency.
An appropriately dimensioned SIRIUS 3RW40 or 3RW44 soft starter should be chosen for
startup processes with motor ramp-up times > 20 s.
The motor feeder between the soft starter and motor must not contain any capacitive
elements (such as compensation systems). Active filters must not be operated in combination
with soft starters.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and switching devices) must be dimensioned
for direct starting and according to the on-site short-circuit conditions, and ordered separately.
The harmonic component load of the starting current must be taken into consideration when
selecting motor starter protectors (trip selection).
Note
Voltage dips generally occur in all start modes (direct starting, wye-delta starting, soft
starting) when a three-phase motor is switched on. The infeed transformer must always be
dimensioned so that the voltage dip at the motor startup remains within the permissible
tolerance. If the infeed transformer is insufficiently dimensioned, the control voltage should
be supplied from a separate circuit (independently of the main voltage) in order to prevent the
voltage dip from disconnecting the 3RW.
Note
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses, motor starter protectors, and switching
devices) must be dimensioned for direct starting and according to the on-site short-circuit
conditions, and ordered separately.
If wye-delta starters are exchanged for soft starters in an existing system, you should check
the fuse ratings in the feeder in order to avoid false tripping. This is particularly important in
connection with heavy-duty starting or if the fuse that is installed has already been operated
close to the thermal tripping limit with the wye-delta assembly.
For recommended fuse and motor starter protector ratings for the feeder with soft starter,
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
11.1.1
Configuration procedure
1. Select the correct starter
What application must be started and what functionality must be provided by the soft starter?
Chapter Selecting the optimum soft starter [Page 74]
2. Take account of the startup class and the switching frequency
Chapters Startup class [Page 76] and Calculating the permissible switching frequency [Page
81]
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
73
Configuration
11.1 Configuration in general
3. Take account of a possible reduction in the soft starter's rated data due to the ambient
conditions and the type of assembly.
Chapter Reducing the rated data [Page 80]
11.1.2
Selecting the optimum soft starter
Selection aid
You can choose the optimum starter from the soft starter types available based on the
intended application or the required functionality.
Normal starting (CLASS 10)
applications
3RW30
3RW40
3RW44
Pump
+
+
+
Pump with special stop (against water hammer)
-
-
+
Heat pump
+
+
+
Hydraulic pump
x
+
+
Press
x
+
+
Conveyor belt
x
+
+
Roller conveyor
x
+
+
Conveyor worm
x
+
+
Escalator
-
+
+
Piston compressor
-
+
+
Screw compressor
-
+
+
-
+
+
Centrifugal blower
-
+
+
Bow thruster
-
+
+
Small fan
1)
+ Recommended soft starter
x Possible soft starter
1) Small fan: Mass inertia (centrifugal mass) of fan < 10 x mass inertia of motor
Heavy-duty starting (CLASS 20)
applications
3RW30
3RW40
3RW44
Agitator
-
x
+
Extruder
-
x
+
Turning machine
-
x
+
Milling machine
-
x
+
+ Recommended soft starter
x Possible soft starter
74
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.1 Configuration in general
Ultra-heavy-duty starting (CLASS 30)
applications
3RW30
3RW40
3RW44
Large fan 2)
-
-
+
Circular saw / band saw
-
-
+
Centrifuge
-
-
+
Mill
-
-
+
Crusher
-
-
+
+ Recommended soft starter
2) Large fan: Mass inertia (centrifugal mass) of fan >= 10 x mass inertia of motor
Soft starter functions
3RW30
3RW40
3RW44
Soft start function
+
+
+
Soft stop function
-
+
+
Integrated intrinsic device protection
-
+
+
Integrated electronic motor overload protection
-
+
+
Settable current limiting
-
+
+
Special pump stop function
-
-
+
Braking in ramp-down
-
-
+
Settable breakaway torque
-
-
+
Communication via PROFIBUS (optional)
-
-
+
External operation and indication display (optional)
-
-
+
Soft Starter ES parameterization software
-
-
+
Special functions, e.g. measured values, display
languages etc.
-
-
+
Motor overload protection acc. to ATEX
-
+
-
+ Recommended soft starter
Note
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter
For more information about the SIRIUS soft starter, refer to the 3RW44 System Manual. You
can download (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
llisapi.dll?func=cslib.csinfo&lang=de&objID=20356385&subtype=133300) the manual free of
charge.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
75
Configuration
11.2 Startup class
11.2
Startup class
To achieve the optimum soft starter design, it is important to know and take into account the
ramp-up time (startup class) of the application. Long ramp-up times mean a higher thermal
load on the thyristors of the soft starter. An appropriately dimensioned SIRIUS 3RW40 or
3RW44 soft starter should be chosen for startup processes with a motor ramp-up time > 20 s.
The maximum permissible ramp-up time for SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters is 20 seconds.
SIRIUS soft starters are designed for continuous operation with normal starting (CLASS 10),
an ambient temperature of 40 °C, and a defined switching frequency (refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]). If other data applies, the starters may need to be calculated with a
size allowance. Using the SIEMENS Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation software, you
can enter your application data and requirements to obtain an optimally dimensioned soft
starter (refer to chapter Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation software [Page 162]).
CAUTION
Risk of property damage
When using the 3RW30: Make sure the selected ramp time is longer than the actual motor
ramp-up time. If not, the SIRIUS 3RW30 may be damaged because the internal bypass
contacts close when the set ramp time elapses. If the motor has not finished starting up, an
AC3 current that could damage the bypass contact system will flow.
When using the 3RW40: The 3RW40 has an integrated ramp-up detection function that
prevents this operating state from occurring.
Selection criteria
Note
You must select the size of your SIRIUS soft starters according to the rated motor current
(rated currentsoft starter >= rated motor current).
76
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.2 Startup class
11.2.1
Application examples for normal starting (CLASS 10) with 3RW30 and 3RW40
Recommended basic parameter settings
Assuming the conditions and constraints indicated below apply, the size of the soft starters
can be equivalent to the motor rating for a normal starting characteristic (CLASS 10).
You can find a suitable soft starter for the required motor rating based on the required startup
class in chapter Technical data [Page 121].
For typical applications where normal starting applies as well as recommended parameter
settings for the soft starter, refer to the table below.
1RUPDOVWDUWLQJ&/$66
7KHVRIWVWDUWHUUDWLQJFDQEHHTXLYDOHQWWRWKHPRWRUUDWLQJ
$SSOLFDWLRQ
&RQYH\RUEHOW
5ROOHUFRQYH\RU
&RPSUHVVRU
6PDOOIDQ
3XPS
+HDWK\GUDXOLFSXPS
2II[,0
6RIWVWRS
5:RQO\
2II[,0
6RIWVWRS
5:RQO\
[,0
[,0
[,0
[,0
6WRSZLWKRXWORDG
6WRSZLWKRXWORDG
6RIWVWRS
6WRSZLWKRXWORDG
5:RQO\
6WDUWSDUDPHWHUV
ವ9ROWDJHUDPSDQG
FXUUHQWOLPLWLQJ
6WDUWLQJYROWDJH
V
5DPSXSWLPH
&XUUHQWOLPLWLQJYDOXH5:
6WRSPRGH
1) Small fan: Mass inertia (centrifugal mass) of fan < 10 x mass inertia of motor
General conditions and constraints
CLASS 10 (normal starting)
3RW30: Maximum ramp-up time 3 s, 300 % starting current, 20 starts / hour
3RW40: Maximum ramp-up time 10 s, 300 % current limiting, 5 starts / hour
ON time
30 %
Standalone assembly
Installation altitude
Max. 1000 m / 3280 ft
Ambient temperature kW
40 °C / 104 °F
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
77
Configuration
11.2 Startup class
11.2.2
Application examples for heavy-duty starting (CLASS 20): 3RW40 only
Recommended basic parameter settings
Assuming the conditions and constraints indicated below apply, the soft starter size must be
at least one power class higher than the motor rating for heavy-duty starting (CLASS 20).
You can find a suitable soft starter for the required motor rating based on the required startup
class in chapter Technical data [Page 121].
For typical applications where heavy-duty starting can apply as well as recommended
parameter settings for the soft starter, refer to the table below.
+HDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJ&/$66
7KHVRIWVWDUWHUPXVWEHDWOHDVWRQHSRZHUFODVVODUJHUWKDQWKHPRWRUUDWLQJ
$SSOLFDWLRQ
6WDUWSDUDPHWHUV
ವ9ROWDJHUDPSDQG
FXUUHQWOLPLWLQJ
6WDUWLQJYROWDJH
V
5DPSXSWLPH
&XUUHQWOLPLWLQJYDOXH5:
6WRSPRGH
$JLWDWRU
([WUXGHU
0LOOLQJPDFKLQH
[,0
2II[,0
[,0
6WRSZLWKRXWORDG
6WRSZLWKRXWORDG
6WRSZLWKRXWORDG
General conditions and constraints
CLASS 20 (heavy-duty starting)
3RW40 2. / 3RW40 3. / 3RW40 4.
Maximum ramp-up time 20 s,
300 % current limiting,
max. 5 starts / hour
3RW40 5. / 3RW40 7.
Maximum ramp-up time 40 s,
350 % current limiting,
max. 1 start / hour
ON time
30 %
Standalone assembly
Installation altitude
Max. 1000 m / 3280 ft
Ambient temperature kW
40 °C / 104 °F
Note
The settings and device dimensions indicated in these tables are examples only; they are
merely provided for information purposes and are not binding. The actual settings depend on
the application and must be optimized when the equipment is commissioned.
If other conditions and constraints apply, either refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] or
check your requirements and selection with the Win-Soft Starter software or with Technical
Assistance (chapter Important notes [Page 11])
78
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.3 ON time and switching frequency
11.3
ON time and switching frequency
Based on the rated motor current and the startup class, the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft
starters are dimensioned for a maximum permissible switching frequency in combination with
a relative ON time (refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121]). If these values are exceeded,
a larger soft starter may have to be selected.
ON time
The relative ON time in % is the ratio between the load duration and the cycle duration for
loads that are frequently switched on and off.
The ON time (OT) can be calculated using the following formula:
W V W E
W V W EW S
27
where:
OT = ON time [%]
ts = ramp-up time [s]
tb = operating time [s]
tp = idle time [s]
The following diagram illustrates this process.
,H
WV
Figure 11-1
WE
WS
W
ON time
Switching frequency
The maximum permissible switching frequency must not be exceeded because the devices
could be damaged due to thermal overloading.
Optional additional fan
The switching frequency of the 3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4. soft starters can be increased by
installing an optional additional fan. For information about factors and how to determine the
maximum switching frequency if an additional fan is installed, refer to chapter Calculating the
permissible switching frequency [Page 81].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
79
Configuration
11.4 Reducing the rated data
11.4
Reducing the rated data
You can reduce the rated data of the SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters if
11.5
•
The installation altitude is higher than 1000 m.
•
The ambient temperature in the switching device's environment exceeds 40 °C.
•
The lateral clearances described earlier are not complied with, e.g. side-by-side assembly
or direct mounting of other switching devices (assembly type).
•
The vertical mounting position is not complied with.
Installation altitude and ambient temperature
Installation altitude
The permissible installation altitude must not be higher than 5000 m above sea level (higher
than 5000 m on request).
If the installation altitude exceeds 1000 m, the rated operational current must be reduced for
thermal reasons.
If the installation altitude exceeds 2000 m, the rated voltage must also be reduced owing to
the restricted dielectric strength. A maximum permissible rated voltage of 460 V applies at
installation altitudes between 2000 m and 5000 m above sea level.
The following diagram shows the reduction in the rated device current as a function of the
installation altitude:
The rated operational current Ie must be reduced at altitudes higher than 1000 m above sea
level.
16%B
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQW,HLQ
Figure 11-2
0RXQWLQJKHLJKWLQP
Reduction as a function of the installation altitude
Ambient temperature
The maximum permissible ambient temperature of the soft starter must not exceed 60 °C.
SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters are designed for operation with nominal current at
an ambient temperature of 40 °C. If this temperature is exceeded, e.g. owing to an
impermissible temperature rise in the control cabinet, other loads, or a general increase in the
ambient temperature, the resulting deterioration in the soft starter's performance must be
80
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.6 Calculating the permissible switching frequency
taken into account when the device is dimensioned (refer to chapter Technical data [Page
121]).
CAUTION
Risk of property damage.
The soft starter may be damaged if the maximum installation altitude (5000 m above sea
level) or an ambient temperature of 60 °C is ignored.
Mounting position, assembly type
The mounting position and assembly type (refer to chapter Installing the soft starter [Page
53]) can influence the soft starter's permissible switching frequency. Refer to chapter
Calculating the permissible switching frequency [Page 81] for the permissible mounting and
assembly combinations as well as the resulting factors for the soft starter switching
frequencies.
11.6
Calculating the permissible switching frequency
11.6.1
Table of permissible assembly combinations with switching frequency factors
The factors indicated in the table refer to the switching frequency (starts / hour) as specified in
chapter Technical data [Page 121].
9HUWLFDOPRXQWLQJ
5:
*UDSK $VVHPEO\W\SH
5:
5:RSWLRQDOIDQ
5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5:
$
%
&
'
6WDQGDORQH
DVVHPEO\
6LGHE\VLGH
DVVHPEO\
6WDQGDORQH
DVVHPEO\
6LGHE\VLGH
DVVHPEO\
+RUL]RQWDOPRXQWLQJ
*UDSK $VVHPEO\W\SH
$
%
&
'
6WDQGDORQH
DVVHPEO\
6LGHE\VLGH
DVVHPEO\
6WDQGDORQH
DVVHPEO\
6LGHE\VLGH
DVVHPEO\
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
5: 5:RSWLRQDOIDQ
5: 5: 5:
6WDQGDUGVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\
+LJKVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\
IDQUHTXLUHG
5HGXFHGVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\
$VVHPEO\W\SHQRWSHUPLWWHG
$VVHPEO\W\SHQRWWHVWHG
81
Configuration
11.6 Calculating the permissible switching frequency
'LUHFWPRXQWLQJRI5:ZLWK59PRWRU
VWDUWHUSURWHFWRU
DQG5$OLQNPRGXOH
6RIWVWDUWHUDVVHPEO\JHQHUDO
'LDJUDP$
5 :
'LDJUDP%
5 :
5 :
'LDJUDP'
'LDJUDP&
5 :
$VVHPEO\RI5:ZLWK59PRWRUVWDUWHUSURWHF
WRUZLWKFDEOHWKHFOHDUDQFHEHWZHHQWKH59DQG
5:FRUUHVSRQGVWRWKHPLQLPXPFOHDUDQFHELQ
WKHGLDJUDPRIFOHDUDQFHVIURPRWKHUGHYLFHV
'LDJUDP$
59
59
59
59
5$
5$
5$
5$
5:
5:
5:
5:
'LDJUDP%
59
59
59
59
5:
5:
5:
5:
&RPELQDWLRQZLWKRSWLRQDO57OLQHFRQWDFWRU7KHPLQLPXPFOHDUDQFHEHWZHHQWKH5:DQG57FRUUHVSRQGVWRWKHPLQLPXP
FOHDUDQFHEFLQWKHGLDJUDPRIFOHDUDQFHVIURPRWKHUGHYLFHV
'LDJUDP$
$VVHPEO\W\SHQRWSHUPLWWHG
82
5:
57
5$
5$
57
5:
'LDJUDP%
57
5:
57
57
57
5:
5:
5:
5:
57
5:
5:
5:
57
57
57
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.6 Calculating the permissible switching frequency
$VVHPEO\RI5:ZLWK59PRWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRU5$OLQNPRGXOHFDEOHDQG57OLQH
FRQWDFWRU7KHPLQLPXPFOHDUDQFHEHWZHHQWKH5:59DQG57FRUUHVSRQGVWRWKHPLQLPXP
FOHDUDQFHEFLQWKHGLDJUDPRIFOHDUDQFHVIURPRWKHUGHYLFHV
'LDJUDP$
'LDJUDP%
'LDJUDP$
'LDJUDP%
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 $
5 $
5 $
5 $
5 $
5 $
5 $
5 $
5 7
5 7
5 7
5 7
5 :
5 :
5 :
5 :
5 :
5 :
5 :
5 :
5 7
5 7
5 7
5 7
$VVHPEO\RI5:ZLWK59PRWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRUDQG57OLQHFRQWDFWRUZLWKFDEOH7KH
PLQLPXPFOHDUDQFHEHWZHHQWKH59DQG57FRUUHVSRQGVWRWKHPLQLPXPFOHDUDQFHEFLQWKH
GLDJUDPRIFOHDUDQFHVIURPRWKHUGHYLFHV
'LDJUDP$
'LDJUDP%
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 9
5 :
5 7
5 :
5 :
5 :
5 7
5 7
5 7
5 7
5 :
5 7
5 7
5 7
5 :
5 :
5 :
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
83
Configuration
11.6 Calculating the permissible switching frequency
E
11
3
5
a
MLFB
a (mm)
a (in)
b (mm)
b (in)
c (mm)
c (in)
3RW30 1./3RW30 2.
15
0.59
60
2.36
40
1.56
3RW30 3./3RW30 4
30
1.18
60
2.36
40
1.56
3RW40 2.
15
0.59
60
2.36
40
1.56
3RW40 3./3RW40 4.
30
1.18
60
2.36
40
1.56
3RW40 5./3RW40 7.
5
0.2
100
4
75
3
a
2
4
6
F
Figure 11-3 Clearances from other devices
11.6.2
Calculating the switching frequency (example)
Problem
The maximum permissible switching frequency of a 5.5 kW (12.5 A) 3RW4024 soft starter
must be determined. The requirements are side-by-side assembly and vertical mounting. A
ramp-up time of approx. 3 s at an ambient temperature of 40 °C is specified as a
supplementary condition (e.g. a pump motor with CLASS 10 starting). The soft starter must
be connected to a 3RV2021 motor starter protector by means of cables. (Clearance between
3RV and 3RW >= 40 mm)
84
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.6 Calculating the permissible switching frequency
Calculating the number of starts / hour of a 3RW40 for side-by-side assembly and vertical
mounting
'LDJUDP%
9HUWLFDOPRXQWLQJ
*UDSK
$
%
5 9
5 9
5 9
&
'
$VVHPEO\W\SH
5:RSWLRQDOIDQ
5:
5:
5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5: 5:
6WDQGDORQH
DVVHPEO\
6LGHE\VLGH
DVVHPEO\
6WDQGDORQH
DVVHPEO\
6LGHE\VLGH
DVVHPEO\
5:
7\SH
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
5 :
5 :
/RDGUDWLQJZLWKUDWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQW,H
ವ$FFRUGLQJWR,(&DQG8/&6$IRUVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\$&D
$Wr&
$Wr&
$Wr&
5 :
0LQLPXPVHWWDEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0
IRUWKHPRWRURYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
3RZHUORVV
ವ'XULQJRSHUDWLRQDIWHUVXFFHVVIXOVWDUWXSZLWKXQLQWHUUXSWHG
UDWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQWr&DSSUR[
ವ'XULQJVWDUWLQJZLWKFXUUHQWOLPLWVHWWR
,0r&
3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQWDQGVWDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUQRUPDOVWDUWLQJ&/$66
5DWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0UDPSXSWLPHV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
$
$
$
$
:
:
$
bbK
Assembly of a 3RV2021 motor starter protector and connection of a 3RW40 24 soft starter
with cables and vertical mounting for CLASS 10 starting:
Switching frequency of 3RW40 with standalone assembly:
50 1/h
Switching frequency factor for diagram B without a fan:
0.1
Switching frequency factor for diagram B with a fan 1):
1.6
Maximum permissible switching frequency:
Without fan
1)
With fan :
50 1/h x 0.1 = 5 1/h
50 1/h x 1.6 = 80 1/h
1) Optional fan: 3RW49 28-8VB00
Result
The pump could be started five times an hour providing the above assembly conditions are
complied with (side-by-side assembly, vertical mounting). A switching frequency of up to 80
starts per hour can be achieved by equipping the 3RW4026 with the optional 3RW49288VB00 fan.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
85
Configuration
11.7 Configuration aids
11.7
Configuration aids
11.7.1
Online configurator
Using the online configurator, you can select soft starters based on the rated motor data and
the specified device functionality. The selection of the soft starter is subject to fixed conditions
and constraints, such as switching frequency, startup class etc. These conditions cannot be
changed. You can find the online configurator at www.siemens.de/sanftstarter (https://
mall.automation.siemens.com/WW/guest/configurators/ipc/
ipcFrameset.asp?serumpage=guiIpc&urlParams=PROD%5FID%3D3RW&MLFB=&proxy=m
all%2Eautomation%2Esiemens%2Ecom&retURL=%2FWW%2Fguest%2Findex%2Easp%3F
nodeID%3D9990301%26lang%3Dde&lang=en).
11.7.2
Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation software
The Win-Soft Starter software can be used to simulate and select all SIEMENS soft starters,
taking into account various parameters such as the supply system conditions, motor data,
load data, high switching frequencies etc.
It is a useful tool, which does away with the need for time-consuming and complex manual
calculations if you need to select the optimum soft starter for your particular case.
Further information under:
www.siemens.de/sanftstarter > software > Win-Soft Starter (http://
www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/low-voltage/en/industrial-controls/controls/solid-stateswitching-devices/soft/software/win-soft-starter/Pages/default.aspx)
11.7.3
Technical Assistance
SIEMENS Technical Assistance offers personal support to help you find the optimum device
and provides assistance with technical queries relating to low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear
Technical Assistance:
Phone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8°° - 17°° CET) Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
e-mail: (mailto:[email protected])
Internet: (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance)
86
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.7 Configuration aids
11.7.4
SIRIUS soft starter training course (SD-SIRIUSO)
SIEMENS offers a two-day training course on SIRIUS electronic soft starters to keep both
customers and our own employees up to date with the latest information about configuring,
commissioning, and maintenance.
Please address all inquiries and enrollments to:
Training Center Erlangen
A&D PT 4
Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 65
D-91052 Erlangen
Phone: ++49 9131 729262
Fax: ++49 9131 728172
e-mail: (mailto:[email protected])
Internet: (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain)
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
87
Configuration
11.8 Order number system for the 3RW30
11.8
Order number system for the 3RW30
5 : % % 6SHFLDOYHUVLRQV
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
5DWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V
6RIWVWDUWHUIXQFWLRQDOLW\%% %\SDVVHWF
&RQQHFWLRQW\SHVFUHZVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDO
6L]HUDWHGRSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW,H
6RIWVWDUWHUW\SH
6RIWVWDUWHU
Rated current and rated power at Ue= 400 V / 460 V and Tamb = 40 °C / 50 °C
13
Ie = 3.6 A / 3 A
Pe = 1.5 kW / 1.5 hp
14
Ie = 6.5 A / 4.8 A
Pe = 3 kW / 3 hp
16
Ie = 9.0 A / 7.8 A
Pe = 4 kW / 5 hp
17
Ie = 12.5 A / 11 A
Pe = 5.5 kW / 7.5 hp
18
Ie = 17.6 A / 17 A
Pe = 7.5 kW / 10 hp
26
Ie = 25 A / 23 A
Pe = 11 kW / 15 hp
27
Ie = 32 A / 29 A
Pe = 15 kW / 20 hp
28
Ie = 38 A / 34 A
Pe = 18.5 kW / 25 hp
36
Ie = 45 A / 42 A
Pe = 22 kW / 30 hp
37
Ie = 63 A / 58 A
Pe = 30 kW / 40 hp
38
Ie = 72 A / 62 A
Pe = 37 kW / 40 hp
46
Ie = 80 A / 73 A
Pe = 45 kW / 50 hp
47
Ie = 106 A / 398 A
Pe = 55 kW / 75 hp
Size S00
Size S0
Size S2
Size S3
For more information, refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
88
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Configuration
11.9 Order number system for the 3RW40
11.9
Order number system for the 3RW40
5 : % % 6SHFLDOYHUVLRQV
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
5DWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V
6RIWVWDUWHUIXQFWLRQDOLW\%% E\SDVV7% E\SDVV
WKHUPLVWRUHWF
&RQQHFWLRQW\SHVFUHZVSULQJORDGHG
6L]HUDWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQW,H
6RIWVWDUWHUW\SH
6RIWVWDUWHU
Rated current and rated power at Ue= 400 V / 460 V and Tamb = 40 °C / 50 °C
24
Ie = 12.5 A / 11 A
Pe = 5.5 kW / 7.5 hp
26
Ie = 25 A / 23 A
Pe = 11 kW / 15 hp
27
Ie = 32 A / 29 A
Pe = 15 kW / 20 hp
28
Ie = 38 A / 34 A
Pe = 18.5 kW / 25 hp
36
Ie = 45 A / 42 A
Pe = 22 kW / 30 hp
37
Ie = 63 A / 58 A
Pe = 30 kW / 40 hp
38
Ie = 72 A / 62 A
Pe = 37 kW / 40 hp
46
Ie = 80 A / 73 A
Pe = 45 kW / 50 hp
47
Ie = 106 A / 98 A
Pe = 55 kW / 75 hp
55
Ie = 132 A / 117 A
Pe = 75 kW / 75 hp
56
Ie = 160 A / 145 A
Pe = 90 kW / 100 hp
73
Ie = 230 A / 205 A
Pe = 132 kW / 150 hp
74
Ie = 280 A / 248 A
Pe = 160 kW / 200 hp
75
Ie = 350 A / 315 A
Pe = 200 kW / 250 hp
76
Ie = 432 A / 385 A
Pe = 250 kW / 300 hp
Size S0
Size S2
Size S3
Size S6
Size S12
For more information, refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
89
Configuration
11.9 Order number system for the 3RW40
90
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.1
12
Before commencing work: Isolating the equipment from the supply
system and ensuring that it cannot be reconnected.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage Will cause death or serious injury.
• Disconnect the system and all devices from the power supply before starting work.
•
Secure against switching on again.
•
Verify that the equipment is not live.
•
Ground and short-circuit.
•
Erect barriers around or cover adjacent live parts.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage Will cause death or serious injury.
Qualified Personnel.
The equipment / system may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel.
For the purpose of the safety information in these Operating Instructions, a "qualified person"
is someone who is authorized to energize, ground, and tag equipment, systems, and circuits
in accordance with established safety procedures.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
91
Commissioning
12.2 Commissioning the 3RW30
12.2
Commissioning the 3RW30
Commissioning, description of the start and output parameters
12.2.1
Commissioning procedure
1. Check the voltages and wiring.
2. Set the start parameters (for recommended parameters, refer to the quick commissioning
table).
3. Start up the motor and if necessary optimize the parameters (refer to the quick
commissioning table).
4. Document the parameter settings if required (refer to chapter Table of parameters used
[Page 205]).
92
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.2 Commissioning the 3RW30
12.2.2
Quick commissioning of the 3RW30 and optimization of the parameters
4XLFNFRPPLVVLRQLQJRI
6,5,865:
VRIWVWDUWHU
&$87,21
5LVNRISURSHUW\GDPDJH
&RQQHFWLRQWRXQDVVLJQHGWHUPLQDOVLVQRWSHUPLWWHG
&KHFNWKHZLULQJ
&RQWUROXQLWDQG
3RZHUXQLW
6WDUWSDUDPHWHUV
5HFRPPHQGHGVHWWLQJ
6WDUWLQJYROWDJH
3DUDPHWHUL]HWKHGHYLFH
6RIWVWDUWIXQFWLRQ
5DPSWLPHV
6WDUWLQJYROWDJH
6HWWRWKHUHTXLUHGYDOXHVUHIHUWRWDEOHRI
UHFRPPHQGHGVHWWLQJV
5DPSWLPHV
$SSOLFDWLRQ
V
&RQYH\RUEHOW
5ROOHUFRQYH\RU
&RPSUHVVRU
6PDOOIDQ
3XPS
+\GUDXOLFSXPS
$JLWDWRU
&KHFNDQGFRQQHFWWKH
YROWDJHVLQWKHFRQWURODQG
PDLQFLUFXLWV
,VWKH'(9,&(/('
OLWFRQWLQXRXVO\
JUHHQ"
&$87,21
5LVNRISURSHUW\GDPDJH
7DNHDFFRXQWRIWKHVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\UHIHUWRWKHWHFKQLFDOGDWD
7KHVRIWVWDUWHUFRXOGEHGDPDJHGLIWKHVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\LVWRRKLJK
1R
&KHFNWKHVXSSO\
YROWDJHDWWHUPLQDOV$
DQG$
'HWHUPLQHDQGUHFWLI\WKH
FDXVHRIWKHIDXOWXVLQJ
WKH/('VDQGWKHVWDWH
WDEOHUHIHUWR7URXEOH
VKRRWLQJFKDSWHU
<HV
&RQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU,1!
<HV
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU,1!
,QFUHDVHWKHUDPS
WLPHWXUQWKH
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
FORFNZLVH
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU,1!
5HGXFHWKHUDPSWLPH
WXUQWKHSRWHQWLRPHWHU
FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
7KHPRWRUUHDFKHV
7KHPRWRUUHDFKHVLWV
LWVQRPLQDOVSHHG
QRPLQDOVSHHG
0XFKIDVWHUWKDQ
$IWHUWKHVHWUDPS
WKHVHWUDPSWLPH
WLPH
0RWRU 1RWDWDOOVWLFNV
:LWKDWRUTXHLQFUHDVH
WKDWLVWRRUDSLG
:LWKDVWDUWLQJFXUUHQW
WKDWLVWRRKLJK
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU,1!
,QFUHDVHWKHVWDUWLQJ
YROWDJHWXUQWKH
SRWHQWLRPHWHUFORFNZLVH
7KHPRWRU
GRHVQRW
VWDUW
LPPHGLDWHO\
EXWKXPV
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU
,1!
5HGXFHWKHVWDUWLQJ
YROWDJHWXUQWKH
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
/('V
'(9,&(OLWFRQWLQXRXVO\
JUHHQ67$7(%<3$66('
IODVKLQJJUHHQ"
1R
<HV
7KHPRWRU
VWDUWVZLWK
WRUTXH
VXUJHV
1R
'RHVWKHPRWRU
VWDUWXSVPRRWKO\"
<HV
0RWRU
1R
'RHV
WKHPRWRUUHDFK
LWVQRPLQDOVSHHGUDSLGO\
ZLWKLQWKH
VSHFLILHGWLPH"
<HV
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU,1!
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
FRPSOHWH
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
93
Commissioning
12.2 Commissioning the 3RW30
12.2.3
Setting the soft start function
Voltage ramp
The SIRIUS 3RW30 achieves soft starting by means of a voltage ramp. The motor terminal
voltage is increased from a parameterizable starting voltage to the mains voltage within a
definable ramp time.
9ROWDJHLQ
8PRWRU
6WDUWLQJ
YROWDJH
YROWDJH
RQPRWRU
7LPHW
V
5DPSWLPH
0RWRUWRUTXH0
1P
0'LUHFWRQOLQHVWDUWLQJ
PD[LPXPWRUTXH
WKDWFDQEHJHQHUDWHG
01RP
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
VWDUWYROWDJH
$FFHOHUDWLRQ
WRUTXH
6SHHGQ
PLQ
06RIWVWDUW
6KRUWUDPSWLPH
06RIWVWDUW
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
WRUTXHVWDUWLQJWLPH
0RWRUKDVUXQXSDQGLV
LQQRPLQDORSHUDWLRQQ1RP
/RQJHUUDPSWLPH
0/RDGHJ)DQ
94
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.2 Commissioning the 3RW30
12.2.4
Setting the starting voltage
U potentiometer
The starting voltage value is set with the U potentiometer. This value determines the starting
torque of the motor. A lower starting voltage results in a lower starting torque (softer start) and
a lower starting current.
The starting voltage selected must be sufficiently high to ensure that motor starts up smoothly
as soon as the start command is received by the soft starter.
12.2.5
Setting the ramp time
t potentiometer
You define the length of the required ramp time with the t potentiometer. The ramp time
determines the time taken to increase the motor voltage from the parameterized starting
voltage to the mains voltage. This time merely influences the motor's acceleration torque,
which drives the load during the ramp-up process. The actual motor starting times are loaddependent and can differ from the 3RW soft starter settings.
A longer ramp time results in a lower starting current and a reduced acceleration torque as
the motor starts up. The startup is slower and smoother as a result. The ramp time must be
long enough for the motor to reach its nominal speed. If the time selected is too short, in other
words if the ramp time ends before the motor has started up successfully, a very high starting
current that can even equal the direct starting current at the same speed occurs at this
instant.
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter can be damaged in this application (set ramp time shorter
than the actual motor ramp-up time). A maximum ramp-up time of 20 s is possible for the
3RW30. An appropriately dimensioned SIRIUS 3RW40 or 3RW44 soft starter should be
chosen for startup processes with a motor ramp-up time > 20 s.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
95
Commissioning
12.2 Commissioning the 3RW30
CAUTION
Risk of property damage
Make sure the selected ramp time is longer than the actual motor ramp-up time. If not, the
SIRIUS 3RW30 may be damaged because the internal bypass contacts close when the set
ramp time elapses. If the motor has not finished starting up, an AC3 current that could
damage the bypass contact system will flow.
When using the 3RW40: The 3RW40 has an integrated ramp-up detection function that
prevents this operating state from occurring.
12.2.6
ON output
ON output contact
IN
1
tR on
UN
t
U
US
tR on
ON
t
13/14
tR on
t
Figure 12-1 State diagram of the ON output contact
The output contact at terminal 13/14 (ON) closes if a signal is present at terminal 1 (IN); it
remains closed until the start command is removed.
The output can be used, for instance, to control a line contactor connected upstream or to
implement latching if you selected pushbutton control. For recommended circuits, refer to
chapter Typical circuit diagrams [Page 167].
For the state diagram of the contacts in the various operating states, refer to chapter 3RW30:
LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44].
96
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.3 3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting
12.3
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting
/('VRQ5:
6RIWVWDUWHU
'(9,&(
UGJQ\OZ
5:
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFW
67$7(%<3$66('
)$,/85(
JQUG
21
8V 2SHUDWLQJVWDWH
,1
2II
JQ
6WDUW
JQ
%\SDVVHG
JQ
JQ
JQ
)DXOW
,PSHUPLVVLEOHHOHFWURQLFVVXSSO\
YROWDJH
%\SDVVRYHUORDG
UG
\OZ
UG
JQ
UG
UG
UG
0LVVLQJORDGYROWDJH
3KDVHIDLOXUHPLVVLQJORDG
'HYLFHIDXOW
/('V
2II
21
)ODVKLQJ
JQ
UG
\OZ
*UHHQ
5HG
<HOORZ
1) The fault is automatically reset by an outgoing event. An automatic restart is initiated and
the 3RW restarted if a start command is present at the input.
WARNING
Automatic restart
Danger of death, serious injury, or property damage.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
2) The fault can be acknowledged by removing the start command at the start input.
3) Switch off the control voltage, then switch it on again. If the fault is still present, contact
your SIEMENS partner or Technical Assistance.
For notes on troubleshooting, refer to the table below.
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Impermissible electronics supply
voltage
The control supply voltage does not
correspond to the soft starter's rated
voltage.
Check the control supply voltage; an
incorrect control supply voltage could be
caused by a power failure or a voltage
dip.
Bypass overload
A current > 3.5 x Ie of the soft starter
occurs for > 60 ms in bypass mode (e.g.
because the motor is blocked).
Check the motor and load, and check the
soft starter's dimensions.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
97
Commissioning
12.4 Commissioning the 3RW40
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Missing load voltage, phase failure
/ missing load
Cause 1: Phase L1 / L2 / L3 is missing or
fails / collapses when the motor is
operating.
Connect L1 / L2 / L3 or correct the voltage
dip.
Tripped as a result of a dip in the
permissible rated operational voltage >
15 % for > 100 ms during the startup
process or > 200 ms in bypass mode.
Device fault
12.4
Cause 2: The motor that is connected is
too small and the fault occurs as soon as
it is switched to bypass mode.
If less than 10 % of the soft starter's rated
current is flowing, the motor cannot be
operated with soft starter. Use another
soft starter.
Cause 3: Motor phase T1 / T2 / T3 is not
connected.
Connect the motor properly (e.g. jumpers
in the motor terminal box, repair switch
closed etc.)
Soft starter defective.
Contact your SIEMENS partner or
Technical Assistance.
Commissioning the 3RW40
Commissioning, description of the start, stop, motor protection, and output parameters
98
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.4 Commissioning the 3RW40
12.4.1
Commissioning procedure
1. Check the voltages and wiring.
2. Set the start and stop parameters (for recommended parameters, refer to the quick
commissioning table).
3. Set the motor overload function (if required)
4. Define the RESET mode if a failure occurs.
5. Start up the motor and if necessary optimize the parameters (refer to the quick
commissioning table).
6. Document the parameter settings if required.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
99
Commissioning
12.4 Commissioning the 3RW40
12.4.2
Quick commissioning of the 3RW40 and optimization of the parameters
4XLFNFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
RI6,5,865:
VRIWVWDUWHU
&$87,21
5LVNRISURSHUW\GDPDJH
&RQQHFWLRQWRXQDVVLJQHGWHUPLQDOVLVQRW
SHUPLWWHG
5HFRPPHQGHGVHWWLQJ
$SSOLFDWLRQ
6WDUWSDUDPHWHUV
6WDUWLQJ 5DPSWLPH &XUUHQW
OLPLWLQJ
YROWDJH
V
YDOXH
&RQYH\RUEHOW
5ROOHUFRQYH\RU
&RPSUHVVRU
6PDOOIDQ
V
6WRSSDUDPHWHU
5DPSGRZQ
WLPHV
[ ,H
V
[,H
[,H
[,H
[,H
3XPS
[,H
+\GUDXOLFSXPS
[,H
$JLWDWRU
[,H
0LOOLQJPDFKLQH
[,H
&KHFNWKHZLULQJ
&RQWUROXQLWDQG
3RZHUXQLW
3DUDPHWHUL]HWKHGHYLFH
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ
6HWWKHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQWRIWKHRSHUDWLQJPHFKDQLVPZLWK
WKH,HDGMXVWHU
6HWWKHUHTXLUHGWULSFODVVZLWKWKH&/$66VZLWFK
6RIWVWDUWIXQFWLRQ
&XUUHQWOLPLWLQJYDOXH[,H
5DPSWLPHV
5DPSGRZQWLPHV
6HWWRWKHUHTXLUHGYDOXHVUHIHUWRWDEOHRI
UHFRPPHQGHGVHWWLQJV
'HWHUPLQHDQGUHFWLI\WKH
&KHFNDQGFRQQHFWWKH
FDXVHRIWKHIDXOWXVLQJWKH
YROWDJHVLQWKHFRQWURODQG
/('VDQGWKHVWDWHWDEOH
PDLQFLUFXLWV
UHIHUWR7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ
FKDSWHU
'(9,&(/('
OLWFRQWLQXRXVO\JUHHQ
DOORWKHU/('V
RII"
1R
<HV
&RQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU,1!
<HV
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU,1!
,QFUHDVHWKHUDPSWLPH
WXUQWKHSRWHQWLRPHWHU
FORFNZLVH
5HGXFHWKHFXUUHQW
OLPLWLQJYDOXHWXUQWKH
SRWHQWLRPHWHUFRXQWHUFORFN
ZLVH
7KHPRWRUUHDFKHV
LWVQRPLQDOVSHHG
:LWKDWRUTXH
LQFUHDVHWKDWLVWRR
UDSLG
)DVWHUWKDQ
VSHFLILHGZLWKD
VWDUWLQJFXUUHQWWKDW
LVWRRKLJK
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIWVWDUWHU'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIWVWDUWHU
,1!
,1!
,QFUHDVHWKHVWDUWLQJ
5HGXFHWKHUDPSWLPH
YROWDJHWXUQWKHSRWHQWLRP
WXUQWKHSRWHQWLRPHWHU
HWHUFORFNZLVHRU
FRXQWHUFORFNZLVHRU
,IFXUUHQWOLPLWLQJLVVHW ,IFXUUHQWOLPLWLQJLVVHW
LQFUHDVHWKHOLPLWLQJYDOXH LQFUHDVHWKHOLPLWLQJYDOXH
WXUQWKHSRWHQWLRPHWHU
WXUQWKHSRWHQWLRPHWHU
FORFNZLVH
FORFNZLVH
0RWRU
7KHPRWRU
UHDFKHVLWV
QRPLQDOVSHHG
6ORZHUWKDQ
VSHFLILHG
1RWDWDOO
VWLFNV
7KHPRWRU
GRHVQRWVWDUW
LPPHGLDWHO\
EXWKXPV
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIW
VWDUWHU,1!
5HGXFHWKHVWDUWLQJ
YROWDJHWXUQWKH
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
/('V
'(9,&(OLWFRQWLQXRXVO\
JUHHQ67$7(%<3$66('
IODVKLQJJUHHQ"
1R
<HV
1R
7KHPRWRU
VWDUWVZLWK
WRUTXHVXUJHV
'RHVWKHPRWRU
VWDUWXSVPRRWKO\"
<HV
'RHV
WKHPRWRUUHDFK
LWVQRPLQDOVSHHG
UDSLGO\ZLWKLQWKH
VSHFLILHGWLPH"
0RWRU
<HV
1R
,QFUHDVHWKHUDPSGRZQWLPH
WXUQWKHSRWHQWLRPHWHUFORFNZLVH
/('V
'(9,&(OLWFRQWLQXRXVO\
JUHHQ
67$7(%<3$66('
IODVKLQJJUHHQ"
5HGXFHWKHUDPSGRZQWLPH
WXUQWKHSRWHQWLRPHWHU
FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
1R
<HV
'LVFRQQHFWWKHVRIWVWDUWHU,1!
0RWRUVWRSV
DEUXSWO\QRW
VPRRWKO\
0RWRUFRDVWVIRUWRR
ORQJ
<HV
:KDW
VWRSPRGHLVVHOHFWHG"
6WRSZLWKRXW
ORDG
6RIWVWRS
6RIWVWRS
1R
100
'RHVWKHPRWRU
VWRSDVVSHFLILHG"
<HV
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
FRPSOHWH
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.4 Commissioning the 3RW40
12.4.3
Setting the soft start function
Voltage ramp
The SIRIUS 3RW40 achieves soft starting by means of a voltage ramp. The motor terminal
voltage is increased from a parameterizable starting voltage to the mains voltage within a
definable ramp time.
9ROWDJHLQ
8PRWRU
6WDUWLQJ
YROWDJH
YROWDJH
RQPRWRU
7LPHW
V
5DPSWLPH
0RWRUWRUTXH0
1P
0'LUHFWRQOLQHVWDUWLQJ
PD[LPXPWRUTXH
WKDWFDQEHJHQHUDWHG
01RP
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
VWDUWYROWDJH
$FFHOHUDWLRQ
WRUTXH
6SHHGQ
PLQ
06RIWVWDUW
6KRUWUDPSWLPH
06RIWVWDUW
3DUDPHWHUL]DEOH
WRUTXHVWDUWLQJWLPH
0RWRUKDVUXQXSDQGLV
LQQRPLQDORSHUDWLRQQ1RP
/RQJHUUDPSWLPH
0/RDGHJ)DQ
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
101
Commissioning
12.4 Commissioning the 3RW40
12.4.4
Setting the starting voltage
U potentiometer
The starting voltage value is set with the U potentiometer. This value determines the starting
torque of the motor. A lower starting voltage results in a lower starting torque (softer start) and
a lower starting current.
The starting voltage selected must be sufficiently high to ensure that motor starts up smoothly
as soon as the start command is received by the soft starter.
12.4.5
Setting the ramp time
t potentiometer
You define the length of the required ramp time with the t potentiometer. The ramp time
determines the time taken to increase the motor voltage from the parameterized starting
voltage to the mains voltage. This time merely influences the motor's acceleration torque,
which drives the load during the ramp-up process. The actual motor starting times are loaddependent and can differ from the 3RW soft starter settings.
A longer ramp time results in a lower starting current and a reduced acceleration torque as
the motor starts up. The startup is slower and smoother as a result. The ramp time must be
long enough for the motor to reach its nominal speed. If the time selected is too short, in other
words if the ramp time ends before the motor has started up successfully, a very high starting
current that can even equal the direct starting current at the same speed occurs at this
instant.
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter additionally limits the current to the value set with the current
limiting potentiometer. As soon as the current limiting value is reached, the voltage ramp or
the ramp time is interrupted and the motor is started with the current limiting value until it has
started up successfully. In this case, the motor ramp-up times may be longer than the
maximum parameterizable 20 seconds ramp time or the ramp time that is actually set on the
soft starter (for further information about the maximum ramp-up times and switching
frequencies, refer to the Technical data chapter > 3RW30 13, 14, 16, 17, 18-.BB.. power
electronics [Page 124]) ff. and 3RW40 24, 26, 27, 28 power electronics [Page 149] ff.).
102
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.4 Commissioning the 3RW40
12.4.6
Current limiting in conjunction with a starting voltage ramp and ramp-up
detection
Current limiting
0RWRUFXUUHQW
,
,GLUHFWPRWRUVWDUWLQJ
,
6RIWVWDUWHU6HWWDEOH
FXUUHQWOLPLWLQJYDOXH
6WDUWGHWHUPLQHG
E\VHWVWDUWPRGH
LQWKLVFDVH
YROWDJHUDPS
,HPRWRU
QHPRWRU
0RWRUVSHHG
Q
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter measures the phase current (motor current) continuously with
the help of integrated current transformers.
The motor current that flows during the startup process can be actively limited by means of
the soft starter. The current limiting function takes priority over the voltage ramp function.
As soon as a parameterizable current limit is reached, in other words, the voltage ramp is
interrupted and the motor is started with the current limiting value until it has started up
successfully. The current limiting function is always active with SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters. If
the current limiting potentiometer is set to the clockwise stop (maximum), the starting current
is limited to five times the set rated motor current.
12.4.7
Setting the motor current
Ie potentiometer
The rated operational current of the motor must be set with the Ie potentiometer according to
the mains voltage and the motor connection (wye-delta). The electronic motor overload
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
103
Commissioning
12.4 Commissioning the 3RW40
protection also refers to this set value if it is active. For the permissible settings referred to the
required motor overload trip class, refer to chapter Motor current settings [Page 107].
12.4.8
Setting the current limiting value
xIe potentiometer
The current limiting value is set with the xIe potentiometer to the maximum required starting
current as a factor of the set rated motor current (Ie).
Example
•
Ie potentiometer set to 100 A
•
xIe potentiometer set to 5 => current limiting 500 A.
As soon as the selected current limiting value is reached, the motor voltage is reduced or
controlled by the soft starter to prevent the current from exceeding the limit. Since the starting
current is asymmetrical, the set current corresponds to the arithmetic mean value for the
three phases.
If the current limiting value is set to the equivalent of 100 A, the starting currents might be
approx. 80 A in L1, 120 A in L2, and 100 A in L3 (refer to chapter Starting current asymmetry
[Page 21]).
The set current limiting value must be high enough to ensure that the torque generated in the
motor is sufficient to accelerate the motor to nominal speed. Three to four times the value of
the motor's rated operational current (Ie) can be assumed as typical here.
The current limiting function is always active because it is required by the intrinsic device
protection. If the current limiting potentiometer is set to the clockwise stop (maximum), the
starting current is limited to five times the set rated motor current.
12.4.9
Ramp-up detection
The SIRIUS soft starter has a motor ramp-up detection function that is always active
regardless of the start mode. If it detects a motor startup, the motor voltage is immediately
increased to 100 % of the mains voltage. The thyristors of the soft starter are bridged by the
bypass contacts integrated in the device and the successful startup is indicated by means of
the BYPASS output and the STATE / BYPASSED LED.
104
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.5 Setting the soft stop function
12.5
Setting the soft stop function
In "soft stop" mode, the natural stop process of the load is decelerated. The function is used
when the load must be prevented from stopping abruptly. This is typically the case in
applications with a low mass inertia or a high counter-torque.
9ROWDJH8LQ
8PDLQV
5DPSGRZQWLPH
7LPHW
V
6WRSFRPPDQGRQ
VRIWVWDUWHU
12.5.1
Setting the ramp-down time
t potentiometer
You can set a ramp-down time with the t potentiometer. This determines how long power
should still be supplied to the motor after the ON command is removed. The torque generated
in the motor is reduced by means of a voltage ramp function within this ramp-down time and
the application stops smoothly.
If the potentiometer is set to 0, there is no voltage ramp during stopping (stop without load).
12.6
Setting the motor protection function
The motor overload protection function is implemented on the basis of the winding
temperature. This indicates whether the motor is overloaded or functioning in the normal
operating range.
The winding temperature can either be calculated with the help of the integrated, electronic
motor overload function or measured with a connected motor thermistor.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
105
Commissioning
12.6 Setting the motor protection function
12.6.1
Setting the electronic motor overload protection
Ie potentiometer
The rated operational current of the motor must be set with the Ie potentiometer according to
the mains voltage and the motor connection (wye-delta).
The current flow during motor operation is measured by measuring the current with
transformers integrated in the soft starter. This value is also used for the current limiting
function. The temperature rise in the winding is calculated based on the rated operational
current set for the motor.
CLASS potentiometer
You can set the required trip class (10, 15, or 20) with the CLASS potentiometer. A trip is
generated by the soft starter when the standardized characteristic is reached, depending on
the trip class (CLASS setting).
The trip class specifies the maximum time within which a protective device must trip from a
cold state at 7.2 x the rated operational current (motor protection to IEC 60947). The tripping
characteristics represent this time as a function of the tripping current (refer to chapter Motor
protection tripping characteristics for 3RW40 (with symmetry) [Page 161]).
You can set different CLASS characteristics according to the startup class. If the
potentiometer is set to OFF, the "electronic motor overload protection" function is deactivated.
Note
The rated data of the soft starters refers to normal starting (CLASS 10). The starters may
need to be calculated with a size allowance for heavy-duty starting (> CLASS 10). You can
only set a rated motor current that is lower than the soft starter rated current (refer to chapter
Motor current settings [Page 107]); if not, a fault will be indicated by the OVERLOAD LED
(red flashing ) and it will not be possible to start the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter.
106
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.6 Setting the motor protection function
12.6.2
Motor current settings
Motor current settings
12.6.3
Ie [A]
Imin [A]
Imax [A]
CLASS 10
Imax [A]
CLASS 15
Imax [A]
CLASS 20
3RW40 24-...
12.5
5
12.5
11
10
3RW40 26-...
25.3
10.3
25.3
23
21
3RW40 27-...
32.2
17.2
32.2
30
27
3RW40 28-...
38
23
38
34
31
3RW40 36-...
45
22.5
45
42
38
3RW40 37-...
63
25.5
63
50
46
3RW40 38-...
72
34.5
72
56
50
3RW40 46-...
80
42.5
80
70
64
3RW40 47-...
106
46
106
84
77
3RW40 55-...
134
59
134
134
124
3RW40 56-...
162
87
162
152
142
3RW40 73-...
230
80
230
210
200
3RW40 74-...
280
130
280
250
230
3RW40 75-...
356
131
356
341
311
3RW40 76-...
432
207
432
402
372
Motor protection acc. to ATEX
Refer to the information in chapter Motor protection / intrinsic device protection (3RW40 only)
[Page 32].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
107
Commissioning
12.7 Thermistor motor protection
12.7
Thermistor motor protection
(Optional for 3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4. with 24 V AC/DC rated control voltage)
.OL[RQWKHUPLVWRU
7\SH$37&WKHUPLVWRU
Thermistor motor protection
After removing the copper jumper between T11/21 and T22, you can connect and evaluate
either a Klixon thermistor integrated in the motor winding (at terminal T11/T21-T22) or a type
A PTC (at terminal T11/T21-T12).
12.8
Motor protection trip test
TEST / RESET button
You initiate a motor overload trip by pressing the RESET / TEST button for longer than five
seconds. The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter is tripped by the fault signal at the OVERLOAD
LED, the FAILURE / OVERLOAD contact 95-98 closes, and the motor that is connected and
running is switched off.
108
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.9 Functions of the outputs
12.9
Functions of the outputs
12.9.1
Functions of the BYPASSED and ON / RUN outputs
IN
13/14
tR on
UN
tR off
t
tR off
t
tR off
t
U
US
tR on
ON 13/14
RUN 13/14
BYPASSED 23/24
tR on
BYPASSED output contact
The BYPASSED output at terminal 23 / 24 closes as soon as the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter
detects that the motor has started up (refer to chapter Ramp-up detection [Page 104]). The
integral bypass contacts simultaneously close and the thyristors are bridged. The integral
bypass contacts and output 23 / 24 open again as soon as the start input IN is removed.
ON / RUN output contact
ON function set: The potential-free output contact at terminal 13/14 (ON) closes if a signal is
present at terminal 1 (IN); it remains closed until the start command is removed (factory
default). The ON function can be used, for instance, as a latching contact if you selected
pushbutton control (refer to chapter Control by pushbutton [Page 168]).
Reparameterizing the output of the ON function (factory default) to RUN
You can reparameterize the output function from ON to RUN by simultaneously pressing two
buttons (refer to chapter Parameterizing the 3RW40 outputs [Page 110]).
RUN function set: The potential-free output contact at terminal 13/14 closes if a signal is
present at terminal 1 (IN); it remains closed until the start command is removed and after that
until the set ramp-down time has elapsed.
If the RUN function is set, you can control a line contactor during the startup process,
operation, or the set soft stop (refer to chapter Control with an optional main / line contactor
[Page 177])
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
109
Commissioning
12.9 Functions of the outputs
For recommended circuits, refer to chapter Typical circuit diagrams [Page 167].
12.9.2
Parameterizing the 3RW40 outputs
Programming the ON / RUN output 13/14 on the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter
110-230V
NO
ON/RUN
IN
NO
BYPASSED
SIRIUS
(1)
(2)
OVERLOAD
DEVICE
RESET MODE
STATE/BYPASSED
FAILURE
x Ie
RESET /TEST
I
(3)
(4)
(3)
(4)
5
1.3
5
10
t
RESET MODE
0
20s
20
15
(1)
OFF
10
CLASS
Figure 12-2
110
U
40
100%
(2)
Overview of buttons / LEDs on the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 and 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.9 Functions of the outputs
(
'
&
%
$
3UHVVWRVWRUH
5(6(77(67
! V
! V
+ROGSUHVVHGGRZQ
5(6(702'(
!V
'(9,&(
JQ
JQ
67$7(
%<3$66('
2))
2))
)$,/85(
2))
2))
$872
2))
21
UG
UG
21 581 581
21
2))
)ODVKLQJ
3UHVVEULHIO\WR
FKDQJH
! V
2))
JQ
2))
2))
)OLFNHULQJ
Reparameterizing the ON / RUN output
A: Control voltage is present and the soft starter is in the normal, fault-free position:
The DEVICE LED is continuously lit (green) while the STATE / BYPASSED and FAILURE
LEDs are off.
The AUTO LED indicates the color of the set RESET mode.
B: Start programming:
(On the 3RW40 2 device, remove the RESET MODE cover as shown in chapter Setting the
RESET MODE [Page 113].) Press the RESET MODE button (2) for longer than 2 s until the
DEVICE LED (3) flickers (green). Hold the RESET MODE button (2) pressed down.
C: Simultaneously press the RESET / TEST button (1) for longer than 1 s until the DEVICE
LED (3) lights up (red). The active mode set at the ON / RUN output is indicated by the STATE
/ BYPASSED / FAILURE LED (4):
STATE / BYPASSED / FAILURE LED (4) flashes (green): ON mode (factory setting).
STATE / BYPASSED / FAILURE LED (4) flickers (green): RUN mode.
D: Change the mode:
Press the RESET MODE button (2) briefly. By pressing this button, you change the mode at
the output, and the new mode is indicated by the STATE / BYPASSED / FAILURE LED (4):
STATE / BYPASSED / FAILURE LED (4) flickers (green): RUN mode is set.
STATE / BYPASSED / FAILURE LED (4) flashes (green): ON mode is set.
E: Exit programming and save the settings:
Press the RESET / TEST MODE button (1) for longer than 1 s until the DEVICE LED (3) lights
up (green).
The LEDs indicate the following states again if the output was successfully parameterized:
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
111
Commissioning
12.9 Functions of the outputs
DEVICE LED: Continuously lit (green).
STATE / BYPASSED and FAILURE LEDs: Off.
The AUTO LED indicates the color of the set RESET mode.
12.9.3
Function of the FAILURE / OVERLOAD output
FAILURE / OVERLOAD output contact
If there is no rated control voltage or if a failure occurs, the potential-free FAILURE /
OVERLOAD output is switched.
Note
For information about whether or not faults can be acknowledged, as well as the recovery
time and the corresponding LED and output contact states, refer to chapter Diagnostics and
fault signals [Page 44].
112
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.10 RESET MODE and functions of the RESET / TEST button
12.10
RESET MODE and functions of the RESET / TEST button
12.10.1
SIRIUS 3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4. soft starters
12.10.1.1 Setting the RESET MODE
Position of the RESET button behind the label on the 3RW40 2.
1
2
3RW40 2...
3
RESET MODE
AUTO RESET
Yellow
Manual RESET
Off
Remote RESET
Green
RESET MODE button
By pressing the RESET MODE button, you define the reset procedure in case of a fault. This
is indicated by the RESET MODE LED.
12.10.1.2 Manual RESET
RESET / TEST button (RESET MODE LED off)
You can reset a fault by pressing the RESET / TEST button.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
113
Commissioning
12.10 RESET MODE and functions of the RESET / TEST button
12.10.1.3 Remote RESET
1/ //
5(6(7
212))
8V
$ $ ! V
W
Remote RESET (RESET MODE LED = green)
You can reset a fault signal by disconnecting the control supply voltage for >1.5 s.
12.10.1.4 AUTO RESET
AUTO RESET (RESET MODE LED = yellow)
If you set the RESET mode to AUTO, a fault is automatically reset.
Note
For information about whether or not faults can be acknowledged, as well as the recovery
time and the corresponding LED and output contact states, refer to chapter Diagnostics and
fault signals [Page 44].
WARNING
Automatic restart
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The automatic RESET mode (AUTO RESET) must not be used in applications where there is
a risk of serious injury to persons or substantial damage to property if the motor starts up
again unexpectedly. The start command (e.g. issued by a contact or the PLC) must be reset
prior to issuing a RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again
automatically following this RESET command if a start command is still present. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to
integrate the group fault output on the 3RW40 (terminals 95 and 96), or the signaling contact
of the motor or miniature circuit breaker on all devices, in the controller.
114
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.10 RESET MODE and functions of the RESET / TEST button
12.10.2
SIRIUS 3RW40 5. to 3RW40 7. soft starters
12.10.2.1 Setting the RESET MODE
AUTO RESET
Yellow
Manual / (remote) RESET
Off
RESET MODE button
By pressing the RESET MODE button, you define the reset procedure in case of a fault. This
is indicated by the AUTO LED.
12.10.2.2 Manual RESET
RESET / TEST button (AUTO LED off)
You can reset a fault by pressing the RESET / TEST button.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
115
Commissioning
12.10 RESET MODE and functions of the RESET / TEST button
12.10.2.3 Remote RESET
1
/ / /
)
1
/
)
7HVW 5HVHW
6
VHF
8 9:
0
0
a
(
(
58$)HUQUHVHW5HPRWH5HVHW
Remote RESET with module for RESET (AUTO LED = off)
You can perform a remote RESET (the RESET MODE set on the starter is MANUAL RESET)
by controlling the optional module for RESET (3RU1900-2A).
12.10.2.4 AUTO RESET
AUTO RESET (AUTO LED = yellow)
If you set the RESET mode to AUTO, a fault is automatically reset.
Note
For information about whether or not faults can be acknowledged, as well as the recovery
time and the corresponding LED and output contact states, refer to chapter Diagnostics and
fault signals [Page 44].
WARNING
Automatic restart
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The automatic RESET mode (AUTO RESET) must not be used in applications where there is
a risk of serious injury to persons or substantial damage to property if the motor starts up
again unexpectedly. The start command (e.g. issued by a contact or the PLC) must be reset
prior to issuing a RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again
automatically following this RESET command if a start command is still present. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to
integrate the group fault output on the 3RW40 (terminals 95 and 96), or the signaling contact
of the motor or miniature circuit breaker on all devices, in the controller.
116
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.11 3RW40: LEDs and troubleshooting
12.11
3RW40: LEDs and troubleshooting
/('VRQ5:
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFWV
6RIWVWDUWHU
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ
67$7(
5(6(7
02'(
%<3$66('
29(5/2$' $872
'(9,&(
)$,/85(
UG
\OZJQ
UGJQ\OZ JQUG
5:
21
581
)$,/85(
%<3$66(' 29(5/2$'
8V 2SHUDWLQJVWDWH
,1
2II
JQ
6WDUW
JQ
JQ
%\SDVVHG
JQ
JQ
6WRS
JQ
JQ
:DUQLQJ
,HLPSHUPLVVLEOH&/$66VHWWLQJ
JQ
6WDUWLQKLELWHGGHYLFHWRRKRWFRROLQJWLPH PD\YDU\DFFRUGLQJWRWK\ULVWRUWHPSHUDWXUH
JQ JQ
\OZ
)DXOW
,PSHUPLVVLEOHHOHFWURQLFVVXSSO\
YROWDJH
UG
,PSHUPLVVLEOH,H&/$66VHWWLQJDQG,1
!
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQWULSSLQJRYHUORDGUHOD\ FRROLQJWLPHVWKHUPLVWRUFRROLQJWLPH
PD\YDU\DFFRUGLQJWRPRWRUWHPSHUDWXUH
7KHUPLVWRUPRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
:LUHEUHDNDJHVKRUWFLUFXLW
JQ
UG
JQ
JQ
7KHUPDORYHUORDGRQGHYLFH
FRROLQJWLPH!V
\OZ
UG
0LVVLQJORDGYROWDJH
3KDVHIDLOXUHPLVVLQJORDG
JQ
UG
'HYLFHIDXOWFDQQRWEHDFNQRZOHGJHG
GHYLFHGHIHFWLYH
UG
UG
7HVWIXQFWLRQ
3UHVV7(67W!V
UG
JQ
5(6(702'(SUHVVWRFKDQJH
0DQXDO5(6(7
$XWR5(6(7
\OZ
5HPRWH5(6(7
JQ
2SWLRQDO5:WR5:LQ9$&'&RQO\
/('V
JQ
2II
21
)ODVKLQJ
\OZ
UG
)OLFNHULQJ *UHHQ <HOORZ 5HG
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
$XWRPDWLFDOO\UHVHWLIWKHVHWWLQJLVFRUUHFWHGRUZKHQWKHV\VWHPUHWXUQVWRQRUPDO
0XVWEHDFNQRZOHGJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHVHOHFWHG5(6(7PRGH 0RWRUSURWHFWLRQWULSWHVW
'HYLFHIDXOWFDQQRWEHDFNQRZOHGJHG&RQWDFW\RXU6,(0(16SDUWQHURU7HFKQLFDO$VVLVWDQFH
117
Commissioning
12.11 3RW40: LEDs and troubleshooting
WARNING
Automatic restart
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The automatic RESET mode (AUTO RESET) must not be used in applications where there is
a risk of serious injury to persons or substantial damage to property if the motor starts up
again unexpectedly. The start command (e.g. issued by a contact or the PLC) must be reset
prior to issuing a RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again
automatically following this RESET command if a start command is still present. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to
integrate the group fault output on the 3RW40 (terminals 95 and 96), or the signaling contact
of the motor or miniature circuit breaker on all devices, in the controller.
Notes on troubleshooting
Warning
Cause
Remedy
Impermissible Ie CLASS setting
(control voltage present, no start
command)
The rated operational current Ie set for
the motor (control voltage present, no
start command) exceeds the associated,
maximum permissible setting current
referred to the selected CLASS setting
(chapter Motor current settings [Page
107]).
Check the rated operational current set
for the motor, select a lower CLASS
setting, or calculate the soft starter with a
size allowance.
Start inhibited, device too hot
The acknowledgment and the motor start
are inhibited for a defined time by the
inherent device protection following an
overload trip, to allow the 3RW40 to cool
down.
Possible causes
•
•
•
•
118
Too many starts,
Motor ramp-up time too long,
Ambient temperature in switching
device's environment too high,
Minimum installation clearances not
complied with.
As long as the 3RW40 is not controlled
IN (0->1), this is only a status signal.
However, it becomes a fault signal if the
start command is applied.
The device cannot be started until the
temperature of the thyristor or the heat
sink has cooled down enough to
guarantee sufficient reserve for a
successful startup. The time until
restarting is allowed can vary but is a
minimum of 30 s.
Rectify the causes and possibly retrofit
the optional fan (3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.).
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Commissioning
12.11 3RW40: LEDs and troubleshooting
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Impermissible electronics supply
voltage:
The control supply voltage does not
correspond to the soft starter's rated
voltage.
Check the control supply voltage; could
be caused by a power failure, voltage dip,
or incorrect control supply voltage. Use a
stabilized power supply unit if due to
mains fluctuations.
Impermissible Ie/CLASS setting
and IN (0->1)
(control voltage present, IN start
command changes from 0 to 1)
The rated operational current Ie set for
the motor (control voltage present, start
command present) exceeds the
associated, maximum permissible setting
current referred to the selected CLASS
setting (chapter Motor current settings
[Page 107]).
Check the rated operational current set
for the motor, select a lower CLASS
setting, or calculate the soft starter with a
size allowance.
For the maximum permissible settings,
refer to chapter "Technical data [Page
121]".
Motor protection tripping Overload
relay / thermistor:
The thermal motor model has tripped.
After an overload trip, restarting is
inhibited until the recovery time has
elapsed.
- Overload relay tripping time: 60 s
- Thermistor tripping time: When the
temperature sensor (thermistor) in the
motor has cooled down.
- Check whether the motor's rated
operational current Ie is set correctly, or
- Change the CLASS setting, or
- Possibly reduce the switching frequency,
or
- Deactivate the motor protection (CLASS
OFF), or
- Check the motor and the application.
Thermistor protection: wire
breakage / short-circuit (optional for
3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4. devices):
Temperature sensor at terminals T11/
T12/T22 is short-circuited or defective, a
cable is not connected, or no sensor is
connected.
Check the temperature sensor and the
wiring
Thermal overload on the device:
Overload trip of the thermal model for the
power unit of the 3RW40
Wait until the device has cooled down
again, possibly increase the current
limiting value set for starting, or reduce
the switching frequency (too many
consecutive starts). Possibly retrofit the
optional fan (3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.).
Possible causes
•
•
•
•
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Too many starts,
Motor ramp-up time too long,
Ambient temperature in switching
device's environment too high,
Minimum installation clearances not
complied with.
Check the load and the motor, check
whether the ambient temperature in the
soft starter's environment is too high
(derating above 40 °C, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]), comply with
the minimum clearances.
119
Commissioning
12.11 3RW40: LEDs and troubleshooting
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Missing load voltage, phase failure
/ missing load:
Cause 1: Phase L1 / L2 / L3 is missing or
fails / collapses when the motor is
operating.
Connect L1 / L2 / L3 or correct the voltage
dip.
Tripped as a result of a dip in the
permissible rated operational voltage >
15 % for > 100 ms during the startup
process or > 200 ms in bypass mode.
Device fault
120
Cause 2: The motor that is connected is
too small and the fault occurs as soon as
it is switched to bypass mode.
Set the correct rated operational current
for the connected motor or set it to the
minimum value (if the motor current is
less than 10 % of the set Ie, the motor
cannot be operated with this starter).
Cause 3: Motor phase T1 / T2 / T3 is not
connected.
Connect the motor properly (e.g. jumpers
in the motor terminal box, repair switch
closed etc.)
Soft starter defective.
Contact your SIEMENS partner or
Technical Assistance.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.1
3RW30
13.1.1
Overview
13
SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters reduce the motor voltage through variable phase angle control
and increase it from a selectable starting voltage up to the mains voltage within the ramp time.
They limit the starting current and torque, so that the shocks that occur during direct starts or
wye-delta starting are avoided. Mechanical loads and mains voltage dips can be effectively
prevented in this way.
Soft starting reduces the stress on the connected equipment, resulting in lower wear and
therefore longer periods of trouble-free production. The selectable starting voltage means the
soft starters can be individually adjusted to the requirements of the application in question and
– unlike wye-delta starters – are not restricted to two-stage starting with fixed voltage ratios.
SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters are characterized above all by their small space requirements.
Integral bypass contacts mean that no power loss has to be taken into account at the power
semiconductors (thyristors) after the motor has started up. This cuts down on heat losses,
enabling a more compact design and making external bypass circuits superfluous.
Soft starters rated up to 55 kW (at 400 V) can be supplied for standard applications in threephase systems. Extremely small sizes, low power losses and simple startup are just three of
the many advantages of this soft starter.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
121
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.2
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and normal starting
5:%%
5:%%
5:%%
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5DWHGSRZHURIWKUHH
SKDVHLQGXFWLRQPRWRUV
IRUUDWHGRSHUDWLRQDO
YROWDJH8H
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
9
9
$
N:
N:
5:%%
6L]H
5DWHGSRZHURIWKUHHSKDVH
LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
9
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
9
9
9
9
N:
$
KS
KS
KS
KS
1RUPDOVWDUWLQJ
2UGHU1R
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUFRQQHFWLRQW\SHV
ದ
ದ
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUUDWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V
ವ9$&'&
ವWR9$&'&
6WDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\ZLWKRXWDGGLWLRQDOIDQ
6RIWVWDUWHUZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFLUFXLWFRQQHFWLRQVFUHZ
WHUPLQDOV
Note
The rated motor current is extremely important when selecting a soft starter.
Refer to the information about selecting soft starters in chapter Configuration [Page 73].
Conditions for normal starting:
Max. ramp time 3 s, starting current 300 %, 20 starts / hour, ON time 30 %, standalone
assembly, max. installation altitude 1000 m / 3280 ft, ambient temperature kW 40 °C / 104 °F.
A larger model may need to be selected if other conditions and constraints apply or for a
higher starting frequency. We recommend using the "Win-Soft Starter" selection and
simulation software. For information about the rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40
°C, refer to chapter 3RW30..-.BB.. power electronics [Page 124].
122
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.3
3RW30..-.BB.. control electronics
7\SH
5:5:
5:5:
9
s
s
P$
P$
P$
+]
s
&RQWUROHOHFWURQLFV
7HUPLQDO
$$
5DWHGYDOXHV
5DWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH
ವ7ROHUDQFH
5DWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\FXUUHQW
ವ67$1'%<
ವ'XULQJSLFNXS
ವ21
5DWHGIUHTXHQF\
ವ7ROHUDQFH
&RQWUROLQSXW
,1
3RZHUFRQVXPSWLRQZLWKYHUVLRQ
ವ9'&
ವ9$&
5HOD\RXWSXWV
2XWSXW
212))
P$
P$
21
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQW
2SHUDWLQJLQGLFDWLRQ12
$
$
3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVWRYHUYROWDJHV
6KRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ
$&$&DW9
'&DW9
3URWHFWLRQE\PHDQVRIYDULVWRUWKURXJKFRQWDFW
$J/J*RSHUDWLRQDOFODVV
$TXLFNIXVHLVQRWLQFOXGHGLQVFRSHRIVXSSO\
2SHUDWLQJLQGLFDWLRQV
/('
2II
6WDUW
%\SDVV
)DXOWVLJQDOV
ವ9'&
8[8VRU8![8V
ವ$&98[8VRU8![8V
(OHFWULFDORYHUORDGLQJRIE\SDVV
UHVHWE\UHPRYLQJ,1FRPPDQG
0LVVLQJPDLQVYROWDJHSKDVHIDLOXUHPLVVLQJORDG
'HYLFHIDXOW
13.1.4
DSSUR[
$&'&
'(9,&(
'(9,&(
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
67$7(%<3$66('
)$,/85(
2II
*UHHQIODVKLQJ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
67$7(%<3$66('
)$,/85(
2II
*UHHQIODVKLQJ
*UHHQ
2II
2II
5HG
5HG
2II
2II
5HG
5HG
<HOORZ
5HG
<HOORZ
5HG
*UHHQ
5HG
5HG
5HG
*UHHQ
5HG
5HG
5HG
3RW30..-.BB.. control times and parameters
5:5:
7\SH
)DFWRU\GHIDXOW
&RQWUROWLPHVDQGSDUDPHWHUV
&RQWUROWLPHV
&ORVLQJGHOD\ZLWKFRQQHFWHGFRQWUROYROWDJH
&ORVLQJGHOD\DXWRPDWLFOLQHFRQWDFWRUPRGH
0DLQVIDLOXUHEULGJLQJWLPH
&RQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH
0DLQVIDLOXUHUHVSRQVHWLPH
/RDGFXUUHQWFLUFXLW
6WDUWSDUDPHWHUV
ವ5DPSXSWLPH
ವ6WDUWLQJYROWDJH
PV
PV
V
1R
5DPSXSGHWHFWLRQ
2SHUDWLQJPRGHRXWSXW
5LVLQJHGJHDW
)DOOLQJHGJHDW
PV
PV
6WDUWFRPPDQG
2IIFRPPDQG
21
0DLQVIDLOXUHGHWHFWLRQRQO\LQVWDQGE\VWDWHQRWGXULQJRSHUDWLRQ
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
123
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.5
3RW30..-.BB.. power electronics
7\SH
5:%%5:%%
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH
7ROHUDQFH
5DWHGIUHTXHQF\
7ROHUDQFH
9$&
+]
s
&RQWLQXRXVGXW\DWr&RI,H
0LQLPXPORDGRI,H
DWOHDVW$
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKEHWZHHQVRIWVWDUWHUDQGPRWRU
P
3HUPLVVLEOHLQVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH
P
'HUDWLQJIURPVHHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVKLJKHURQUHTXHVW
3HUPLVVLEOHDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH
2SHUDWLRQ
6WRUDJH
r
r&
r&
r
r
GHUDWLQJIURP
,3IRU5:DQG5:
,3IRU5:DQG5:
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
13.1.6
r
16%B
3HUPLVVLEOHPRXQWLQJSRVLWLRQ
DX[LOLDU\IDQQRWDYDLODEOH
3RW30 13, 14, 16, 17, 18-.BB.. power electronics
7\SH
5:
5:
5:
5:
5:
$
$
$
ವ'XULQJRSHUDWLRQDIWHUVWDUWXSRIWKHPRWRUDWXQLQWHUUXSWHGUDWHGRSHUDWFXUU
r&DSSUR[
:
ವ'XULQJVWDUWLQJDW,0r&
3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQWDQGVWDUWVSHUKRXU
IRUQRUPDOVWDUWLQJFODVV
:
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
$
K
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
$
K
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
&XUUHQWFDUU\LQJFDSDFLW\UDWHGRSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW,H
ವ$FFWR,(&DQG8/&6$IRUVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\$&D
$Wr&
$Wr&
$Wr&
3RZHUORVV
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWLPHV
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWLPHV
0HDVXUHPHQWDWr&LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK8/&6$QRWUHTXLUHG
$W,07DPE r&r&
)RULQWHUPLWWHQWGXW\6ZLWK21WLPH7DPE r&r&
YHUWLFDOVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\7KHVSHFLILHGVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQFLHVGRQRW
DSSO\WRDXWRPDWLFPRGH
124
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.7
3RW30 26, 27, 28-.BB.. power electronics
5:
5:
5:
$
$
$
ವ'XULQJRSHUDWLRQDIWHUVWDUWXSRIWKHPRWRUDWXQLQWHUUXSWHGUDWHGRSHUDW
FXUUr&DSSUR[
:
ವ'XULQJVWDUWLQJDW,0r&
:
$
K
$
K
7\SH
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
&XUUHQWFDUU\LQJFDSDFLW\UDWHGRSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW,H
ವ$FFWR,(&DQG8/&6$IRUVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\$&D
$Wr&
$Wr&
$Wr&
3RZHUORVV
3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQWDQGVWDUWVSHUKRXU
DWQRUPDOVWDUWLQJFODVV
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWLPHV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWLPHV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
0HDVXUHPHQWDWr&LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK8/&6$QRWUHTXLUHG
$W,07DPE r&r&
)RULQWHUPLWWHQWGXW\6ZLWK21WLPH7DPE r&r&YHUWLFDOVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\7KHVSHFLILHG
VZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQFLHVGRQRWDSSO\WRDXWRPDWLFPRGH)DFWRUVIRUSHUPLVVLEOHVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\ZLWK
GLIIHUHQWPRXQWLQJSRVLWLRQGLUHFWDVVHPEO\VLGHE\VLGHDVVHPEO\VHH&RQILJXUDWLRQFKDSWHU
13.1.8
3RW30 36, 37, 38, 46, 47-.BB.. power electronics
5:
5:
5:
5:
5:
$
$
$
ವ'XULQJRSHUDWLRQDIWHUVWDUWXSRIWKHPRWRUDWXQLQWHUUXSWHGUDWHGRSHUDW
FXUUr&DSSUR[
:
ವ'XULQJVWDUWLQJDW,0r&
3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQWDQGVWDUWVSHUKRXU
DWQRUPDOVWDUWLQJFODVV
:
$
K
$
K
7\SH
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
&XUUHQWFDUU\LQJFDSDFLW\UDWHGRSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW,H
ವ$FFWR,(&DQG8/&6$IRUVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\$&D
$Wr&
$Wr&
$Wr&
3RZHUORVV
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWLPHV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWLPHV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
0HDVXUHPHQWDWr&LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK8/&6$QRWUHTXLUHG
$W,07DPE r&r&
)RULQWHUPLWWHQWGXW\6ZLWK21WLPH7DPE r&r&YHUWLFDO
VWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\7KHVSHFLILHGVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQFLHVGRQRWDSSO\
WRDXWRPDWLFPRGH
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
125
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.9
3RW30 main conductor cross-sections
6RIWVWDUWHU
7\SH
5:
5:
5:
5:
&RQGXFWRUFURVVVHFWLRQV
6FUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
)URQWFODPSLQJSRLQW
FRQQHFWHG
ವ6ROLG
PP
[
[
[
[
[
DFFWR,(& DFFWR,(&
PD[[
[
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
[
[
[
[
[
[
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ದ
ದ
[
[
ವ$:*FDEOHV
6ROLG
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHG
6WUDQGHG
$:*
$:*
$:*
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
ದ
[
ದ
ವ6ROLG
PP
ದ
ದ
[
[
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
ದ
ದ
[
[
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ದ
ದ
[
[
ವ$:*FDEOHV
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHG
$:*
5HDUFODPSLQJSRLQW
FRQQHFWHG
%RWKFODPSLQJSRLQWV
FRQQHFWHG
ದ
ದ
[
[
ವ6ROLG
PP
ದ
ದ
[
[
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ದ
ದ
[
[
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
ದ
ದ
[
[
ವ$:*FDEOHV
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHG
$:*
ದ
ದ
[
[
1P
OELQ
7RROV
3=
3=
3=
$OOHQVFUHZ
PP
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
,3
,3
,3
,3
WHUPLQDOFRPSDUWPHQW WHUPLQDOFRPSDUWPHQW
,3
,3
ವ7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
6SULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
%XVEDUFRQQHFWLRQV
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
ವ6ROLG
PP
PP
ದ
HQGVOHHYHV ದ
ZLWKRXWSODVWLF
FROODU
ದ
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
ವ$:*FDEOHV
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHGILQHO\VWUDQGHG
6WUDQGHG
$:*
$:*
[
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
7RROV
',1,62
$[
',1,62
$[
ದ
ದ
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
,3
,3
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
[
[
ದ
ದ
ದ
[
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
ವ:LWKFDEOHOXJDFFRUGLQJWR',1RU
PD[PPZLGH
6WUDQGHG
PP
)LQHO\VWUDQGHG
PP
$:*
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
126
ದ
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.10
6RIWVWDUWHUV
3RW30 auxiliary conductor cross-sections
7\SH
5:5:
&RQGXFWRUFURVVVHFWLRQV
$X[LOLDU\FRQGXFWRUVRUFRQGXFWRUVFDQEHFRQQHFWHG
6FUHZWHUPLQDOV
ವ6ROLG
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
PP
[
[
ವ$:*FDEOHV
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHG
)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
$:*
$:*
[
[
1P
OELQ
PP
PP
$:*
[
[
[
ವ7HUPLQDOVFUHZV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
6SULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ವ6ROLG
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
13.1.11
Electromagnetic compatibility according to EN 60947-4-2
Standard
Parameters
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-2
±4 kV contact discharge, ±8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields
EN 61000-4-3
Frequency range: 80 to 2000 MHz with 80% at 1 kHz
Degree of severity 3: 10 V/m
Conducted RF interference
EN 61000-4-6
Frequency range: 150 kHz...80 MHz with 80% at 1 kHz
Interference 10 V
RF voltages and RF currents on cables
• Burst
EN 61000-4-4
±2 kV / 5 kHz
• Surge
EN 61000-4-5
±1 kV line to line
±2 kV line to ground
EMC interference field strength
EN 55011
Limit value of Class A at 30...1000 MHz,
Limit value of Class B for 3RW302.; 24 V AC/DC
Radio interference voltage
EN 55011
Limit value of Class A at 0.15...30 MHz,
Limit value of Class B for 3RW302.; 24 V AC/DC
Electromagnetic compatibility according to EN 60947-4-2
EMC interference immunity
EMC interference emission
Radio interference suppression filters
Degree of noise suppression A (industrial applications)
Degree of noise suppression B (applications for residential areas)
Control voltage
• 230 V AC/DC
• 24 V AC/DC
Not required
Not available1)
Not required for 3RW301. and 3RW302;
Required for 3RW303. and 3RW304. (see table)
1) Degree of noise suppression B cannot be obtained through the use of
filters as the strength of the electromagnetic field is not attenuated by the
filter.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
127
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.12
6RIWVWDUWHUW\SHV
Recommended filters
1RPLQDOFXUUHQW
5HFRPPHQGHGILOWHUV
6RIWVWDUWHU
9ROWDJHUDQJHWR9
)LOWHUW\SHV
$
1RPLQDOFXUUHQWILOWHUV
$
7HUPLQDOV
PP
5:b
5:b
5:b
()$$
()$$
()$$
5:b
5:b
()$$
()$$
7KHUDGLRLQWHUIHUHQFHVXSSUHVVLRQILOWHULVXVHGWRUHPRYHWKHFRQGXFWHG
LQWHUIHUHQFHIURPWKHPDLQFLUFXLW7KHILHOGUHODWHGHPLVVLRQVFRPSO\
ZLWKGHJUHHRIQRLVHVXSSUHVVLRQ%7KHILOWHUVKRXOGEHVHOHFWHGXQGHUVWDQGDUGFRQGLWLRQV
VWDUWVSHUKRXUUDPSXSWLPHVDW,H
13.1.13
Types of coordination
Types of coordination
The type of coordination according to which the motor feeder with soft starter is mounted
depends on the application-specific requirements. Normally, fuseless mounting (combination
of motor starter protector and soft starter) is sufficient.
If type of coordination 2 needs to be fulfilled, semiconductor fuses must be fitted in the motor
feeder.
ToC
1
ToC
2
128
Type of coordination 1 in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1:
The device is defective following a short-circuit failure and therefore unsuitable for
further use. (Personnel and equipment must not be put at risk).
Type of coordination 2 in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1:
The device is suitable for further use following a short-circuit failure. (Personnel and
equipment must not be put at risk).
The type of coordination only refers to soft starters in conjunction with the stipulated
protective device (motor starter protector / fuse), not to additional components in the
feeder.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.14
Fuseless version
)XVHOHVVYHUVLRQ
4
0
a
6RIWVWDUWHUV
7R&
1RPLQDO
FXUUHQW
4
7\SH
$
16%B
4
0RWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRUV
5DWHGFXUUHQW
9
4
,TPD[
7\SH
N$
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ
5:b
59($
5:b
5:b
59)$
59+$
59($SURYLV 59)$
59+$
5:b
5:b
5:b
59-$
59.$
59%$
59-$
59.$
59%$
5:b
5:b
5:b
59'$
59($
59)$
59'$
59($
59)$
5:b
5:b
5:b
59*$
59-$
59.$
5:b
5:b
59/$
590$
1)
The rated motor current must be
considered when selecting the devices.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
2)
The types of coordination are described in
chapter Types of coordination [Page 128].
129
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.15
Fused version (line protection only)
)XVHGYHUVLRQOLQHSURWHFWLRQRQO\
)
4
0
a
6RIWVWDUWHUV 1RPLQDO
7R&
FXUUHQW
16%B
4
/LQHSURWHFWLRQPD[LPXP
5DWHG
FXUUHQW
/LQHFRQWDFWRUV
6L]H
4
)
7\SH
$
7\SH
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ ,T N$DW9
RSWLRQDO
4
5:
1$
57
57
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
57
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
1$
57
57
57
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
1$
57
57
57
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
1$
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
1)
57
57
The types of coordination are described in
chapter Types of coordination [Page 128].
Type of coordination 1 only refers to soft
starters in conjunction with the stipulated
protective device (motor starter protector /
fuse), not to any additional components in
the feeder.
130
2)
Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
3)
3NA3 805-1 (NH00), 5SB2 61 (DIAZED),
5SE2 201-6 (NEOZED).
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.16
Fused version with SITOR 3NE1 fuses
Assembly as for type of coordination 2, with SITOR all-range fuses (F´1) for combined
thyristor and line protection.
)XVHGYHUVLRQZLWK6,7251(IXVHVVHPLFRQGXFWRUDQGOLQHSURWHFWLRQ
)RUVXLWDEOHIXVHEDVHVUHIHUWR6(17521VZLWFKLQJDQGSURWHFWLQJGHYLFHVIRUSRZHUGLVWULEXWLRQ
ದದ!6ZLWFKGLVFRQQHFWRUVLQWKH/9&DWDORJDQGWR%(7$SURWHFWLQJದದ!6,725VHPLFRQGXFWRU
IXVHVWKH(7%&DWDORJRUFRQVXOWZZZVLHPHQVGHVLWRU
)ಬ
4
0
a
6RIWVWDUWHUV
7R&
4
7\SH
1RPLQDO
FXUUHQW
16%B
4
$OOUDQJHIXVHV
)ಬ
7\SH
$
/LQHFRQWDFWRUV
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
RSWLRQDO
4
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
5:
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
57
57
57
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
57
57
57
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
57
57
57
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
57
57
1)
The types of coordination are described in
chapter Types of coordination [Page 128].
Type of coordination 2 only refers to soft
starters in conjunction with the stipulated
protective device (motor starter protector /
fuse), not to additional components in the
feeder.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
2)
Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
3)
No SITOR fuse required!
Alternatively: 3NA3 803 (NH00), 5SB2 21
(DIAZED), 5SE2 206 (NEOZED)
131
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
13.1.17
Fused version with SITOR 3NE3/4/8 fuses
Assembly as for type of coordination 2, with additional SITOR fuses (F3) for thyristor
protection only.
)XVHGYHUVLRQZLWK1(6,725IXVHVVHPLFRQGXFWRUSURWHFWLRQE\IXVHOLQHDQGRYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQE\PRWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRU
DOWHUQDWLYHO\LQVWDOODWLRQZLWKFRQWDFWRUDQGRYHUORDGUHOD\SRVVLEOH
)RUVXLWDEOHIXVHEDVHVUHIHUWR6(17521VZLWFKLQJDQG
SURWHFWLQJGHYLFHVIRUSRZHUGLVWULEXWLRQದದ!6ZLWFKGLVFRQQHFWRUV
WKH/9&DWDORJDQGWR%(7$SURWHFWLQJದದ!6,725VHPLFRQGXF
WRUIXVHVLQWKH(7%&DWDORJRUFRQVXOWZZZVLHPHQVGHVLWRU
)
)
4
4
)
4
6RIWVWDUWHUV
7R&
4
7\SH
1RPLQDO
FXUUHQW
0
a
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPLQLPXP
5DWHGFXUUHQW
)
7\SH
$
16%B
0
a
16%B
4
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPD[LPXP
6L]H
$
5DWHGFXUUHQW
)
7\SH
$
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPLQLPXP
5DWHGFXUUHQW
6L]H
)
7\SH
6L]H
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
5:
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
5:b
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
5:b
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
5:b
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6RIWVWDUWHUV 1RPLQDO
7R&
FXUUHQW
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPD[
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPLQ
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
4
)
7\SH
$
7\SH
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPD[
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
)
7\SH
)
7\SH
$
&\OLQGULFDOIXVHV
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
)
7\SH
$
5DWHG
FXUUHQW
$
5:
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1& 5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
1& 1& 5:b
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1& 1& 1& 5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1& 1& 1& 5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1& ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
ದ
ದ
132
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.1 3RW30
6RIWVWDUWHUV 1RPLQDO
7R&
FXUUHQW
/LQHFRQWDFWRUV
RSWLRQDO
0RWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRUV
9
4
7\SH
4
4
7\SH
$
/LQHSURWHFWLRQPD[LPXP
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
5DWHGFXUUHQW
)
7\SH
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
$
5:
57
57
59($
59($SURYLV
1$
5:b
5:b
57
57
57
57
1$
1$
57
57
57
57
57
57
59)$
59+$
59-$
59.$
59%$
5:b
5:b
5:b
59)$
59+$
59-$
59.$
59%$
1$
1$
1$
5:b
5:b
5:b
57
57
57
57
57
57
59'$ 59'$
59($ 59($
59($ 59)$
1$
1$
1$
5:b
5:b
5:b
57
57
57
59*$
59-$
59.$
1$
1$
1$
5:b
5:b
57
57
59/$
590$
1$
1$
1)
The types of coordination are described in
chapter Types of coordination [Page 128].
Type of coordination 2 only refers to soft
starters in conjunction with the stipulated
protective device (motor starter protector /
fuse), not to additional components in the
feeder.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
2)
Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
133
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2
3RW40
13.2.1
Overview
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters have all the same advantages as the 3RW30 soft starters.
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters are characterized above all by their small space requirements.
Integral bypass contacts mean that no power loss has to be taken into account at the power
semiconductors (thyristors) after the motor has started up. This cuts down on heat losses,
enabling a more compact design and making external bypass circuits superfluous.
At the same time, this soft starter comes with additional integrated functions such as settable
current limiting, motor overload and intrinsic device protection, and optional thermistor motor
protection. The higher the motor rating, the more important these functions become because
they make it unnecessary to purchase and install protection equipment (such as overload
relays).
Internal intrinsic device protection prevents thermal overloading of the thyristors and the
power unit defects this can cause. As an option, the thyristors can also be protected against
short-circuiting with semiconductor fuses.
Thanks to integrated status and fault monitoring, this compact soft starter offers many
different diagnostics options. Up to four LEDs and relay outputs permit differentiated
monitoring and diagnostics of the operating mechanism by indicating the operating state as
well as, for example, mains or phase failures, missing load, impermissible tripping times /
CLASS settings, thermal overloading, or device faults.
Soft starters rated up to 250 kW (at 400 V) can be supplied for standard applications in threephase systems. Extremely small sizes, low power losses, and simple commissioning are just
three of the many advantages of the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters.
"Increased safety" type of protection EEx e according to ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter sizes S0 to S12 are suitable for starting explosion-proof
motors with the "increased safety" type of protection EEx e.
134
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.2
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and normal starting
(CLASS 10)
5:%%
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5:%%
5:%%
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
6L]H
5DWHGSRZHURIWKUHHSKDVH
LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
9
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
N:
$
KS
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
5DWHGSRZHURI
WKUHHSKDVH
LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
9
9
$
N:
N:
9 9 9 9
1RUPDOVWDUWLQJ
2UGHU1R
KS
KS
KS
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUFRQQHFWLRQW\SHV
ವ:LWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUUDWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V
ವ9$&'&
ವWR9$&'&
6WDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\ZLWKRXWDGGLWLRQDOIDQ
6RIWVWDUWHUZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFLUFXLWFRQQHFWLRQVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
135
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
Note
The rated motor current is extremely important when selecting a soft starter.
Refer to the information about selecting soft starters in chapter Configuration [Page 73].
Conditions for normal starting (CLASS 10):
Max. ramp-up time 10 s, current limiting 300 %, 5 starts / hour, ON time 30 %, standalone
assembly, max. installation altitude 1000 m / 3280 ft, ambient temperature kW 40 °C / 104 °F.
A larger model may need to be selected if other conditions and constraints apply or for a
higher starting frequency. We recommend using the "Win-Soft Starter" selection and
simulation software. For information about the rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40
°C, refer to chapter 3RW40 2. to 7. power electronics [Page 148].
136
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.3
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and normal starting
(CLASS 10) (with thermistor motor protection evaluation)
5:7%
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5:7%
5:7%
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
5DWHGSRZHURI
WKUHHSKDVH
LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
9
9
9
6L]H
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5DWHGSRZHURIWKUHHSKDVH
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
9 9 9 9
$
N:
N:
N:
$
1RUPDOVWDUWLQJ
&/$66
2UGHU1R
KS
KS
KS
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
6
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
ದ
ದ
6
6
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
6
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
6
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
5:ഋ7%
5:ഋ7%
KS
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ZLWKWKHUPLVWRUPRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
UDWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V9$&'&
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ZLWKWKHUPLVWRUPRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
UDWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V9$&'&
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUFRQQHFWLRQW\SHV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
6WDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\ZLWKRXWDGGLWLRQDOIDQ
6RIWVWDUWHUZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
0DLQFLUFXLWFRQQHFWLRQVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
137
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
Note
The rated motor current is extremely important when selecting a soft starter.
Refer to the information about selecting soft starters in chapter Configuration [Page 73].
Conditions for normal starting (CLASS 10):
Max. ramp-up time 10 s, current limiting 300 %, 5 starts / hour, ON time 30 %, standalone
assembly, max. installation altitude 1000 m / 3280 ft, ambient temperature kW 40 °C / 104 °F.
A larger model may need to be selected if other conditions and constraints apply or for a
higher starting frequency. We recommend using the "Win-Soft Starter" selection and
simulation software. For information about the rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40
°C, refer to chapter 3RW40 2. to 7. power electronics [Page 148].
138
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.4
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and normal starting
(CLASS 10)
5:%%
5:%%
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
5DWHGSRZHURI
WKUHHSKDVH
LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
9
9
9
6L]H
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5DWHGSRZHURIWKUHHSKDVH
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
9 9 9 9
$
N:
N:
N:
$
KS
KS
KS
KS
1RUPDOVWDUWLQJ
&/$66
2UGHU1R
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUFRQQHFWLRQW\SHV
ದ
ದ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
WR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ವ:LWKVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUUDWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V
ವ9$&
ವ9$&
6WDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\
6RIWVWDUWHUZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFLUFXLWFRQQHFWLRQEXVEDUFRQQHFWLRQ
&RQWUROE\ZD\RIWKHLQWHUQDO9'&VXSSO\RUGLUHFWFRQWUROE\
PHDQVRI3/&SRVVLEOH
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
139
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
Note
The rated motor current is extremely important when selecting a soft starter.
Refer to the information about selecting soft starters in chapter Configuration [Page 73].
Conditions for normal starting (CLASS 10):
Max. ramp-up time 10 s, current limiting 300 %, 5 starts / hour, ON time 30 %, standalone
assembly, max. installation altitude 1000 m / 3280 ft, ambient temperature kW 40°C / 104 °F.
A larger model may need to be selected if other conditions and constraints apply or for a
higher starting frequency. We recommend using the "Win-Soft Starter" selection and
simulation software. For information about the rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40
°C, refer to chapter 3RW40 2. to 7. power electronics [Page 148].
140
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.5
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and heavy-duty starting
(CLASS 20)
5:%%
5:7%
5:%%
5:7%
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5:%%
6L]H
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5DWHGSRZHURIWKUHHSKDVH
5DWHGSRZHURI
5DWHG
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLR WKUHHSKDVH
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG QDO
QDO
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
FXUUHQW
FXUUHQW
,H
9 9 9 ,H
9 9 9 9
N:
$
N:
N:
$
5:7%
+HDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJ
&/$66b
2UGHU1R
KS
KS
KS
ದ
6
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
ದ
6
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
KS
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
ದ
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
6
6
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
ದ
6
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
5:ഋഋ%ഋ
6
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUFRQQHFWLRQW\SHV
ವ:LWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUWKHUPLVWRUPRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
ವ6WDQGDUGIXQFWLRQ
ವ7KHUPLVWRUPRWRUSURWHFWLRQRQO\ZLWKUDWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V9$&'&
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUUDWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V
ವ9$&'&
ವ9$&'&
%
7 6WDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\ZLWKRXWDGGLWLRQDOIDQ
6RIWVWDUWHUZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFLUFXLWFRQQHFWLRQVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
141
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
Note
The rated motor current is extremely important when selecting a soft starter.
Refer to the information about selecting soft starters in chapter Configuration [Page 73].
Conditions for normal starting (CLASS 10):
Max. ramp-up time 20 s, current limiting 300 %, 5 starts / hour, ON time 30 %, standalone
assembly, max. installation altitude 1000 m / 3280 ft, ambient temperature kW 40 °C / 104°.
A larger model may need to be selected if other conditions and constraints apply or for a
higher starting frequency. We recommend using the "Win-Soft Starter" selection and
simulation software. For information about the rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40
°C, refer to chapter 3RW40 24, 26, 27, 28 power electronics [Page 149].
142
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.6
Selection and ordering data for standard applications and heavy-duty starting
(CLASS 20)
5:%%
5:%%
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
5DWHGSRZHURI
WKUHHSKDVH
LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
9
9
9
6L]H
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&
5DWHGSRZHURIWKUHHSKDVH
5DWHG
RSHUDWLR LQGXFWLRQPRWRUVIRUUDWHG
RSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8H
QDO
FXUUHQW
,H
9 9 9 9
$
N:
N:
N:
$
KS
KS
KS
KS
ದ
6
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
6
6
+HDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJ
&/$66b
2UGHU1R
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
ದ
6
ದ
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH8HWR9
ವ:LWKVFUHZRUVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUFRQQHFWLRQW\SHV
ದ
ದ
ದ
6
6
ವ:LWKVSULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ವ:LWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
6
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
5:ഋ%%ഋ
2UGHUQXPEHUVXSSOHPHQWIRUUDWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH8V
ವ9$&
ವ9$&
6WDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\
6RIWVWDUWHUZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFLUFXLWFRQQHFWLRQEXVEDUFRQQHFWLRQ
&RQWUROE\ZD\RIWKHLQWHUQDO9'&VXSSO\RUGLUHFWFRQWUROE\
PHDQVRI3/&SRVVLEOH
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
143
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
Note
The rated motor current is extremely important when selecting a soft starter.
Refer to the information about selecting soft starters in chapter Configuration [Page 73].
Conditions for normal starting (CLASS 10):
Max. ramp-up time 40 s, current limiting 350 %, 1 starts / hour, ON time 30 %, standalone
assembly, max. installation altitude 1000 m / 3280 ft, ambient temperature kW 40 °C / 104 °F.
A larger model may need to be selected if other conditions and constraints apply or for a
higher starting frequency. We recommend using the "Win-Soft Starter" selection and
simulation software. For information about the rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40
°C, refer to chapter 3RW40 55, 56, 73, 74, 75, 76 power electronics [Page 151].
144
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.7
3RW40 2., 3., 4. control electronics
5:
7\SH
5:5:
&RQWUROHOHFWURQLFV
7HUPLQDO
$$
9
5DWHGYDOXHV
5DWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH
ವ7ROHUDQFH
s
s
$SSUR[
$SSUR[
5DWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\FXUUHQW
ವ67$1'%<
ವ'XULQJSLFNXS
ವ21ZLWKRXWIDQ
ವ21ZLWKIDQ
P$
P$
P$
P$
5DWHGIUHTXHQF\
ವ7ROHUDQFH
+]
s
&RQWUROLQSXWV
,1
212))
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQW
ವ$&
ವ'&
5HOD\RXWSXWV
2XWSXW
2XWSXW
2XWSXW
P$
P$
21581PRGH
%<3$66('
29(5/2$')$,/85( 2SHUDWLQJLQGLFDWLRQ12
%\SDVVLQGLFDWLRQ12
2YHUORDGIDXOWLQGLFDWLRQ1&12
$
$
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQW
$SSUR[
$SSUR[
3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVWRYHUYROWDJHV
$&$&DW9
'&DW9
3URWHFWLRQE\PHDQVRIYDULVWRUWKURXJKFRQWDFW
$J/J*RSHUDWLRQDOFODVV
$TXLFNIXVHLVQRWLQFOXGHGLQVFRSHRIVXSSO\
6KRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ
)DFWRU\GHIDXOW21PRGH
13.2.8
3RW40 5., 7. control electronics
7\SH
5:
5:
&RQWUROHOHFWURQLFV
7HUPLQDO
9$&
$$
5DWHGYDOXHV
5DWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH
ವ7ROHUDQFH
5DWHGFRQWUROVXSSO\FXUUHQW
ವ67$1'%<
ವ'XULQJSLFNXS
ವ21
5DWHGIUHTXHQF\
ವ7ROHUDQFH
&RQWUROLQSXWV
,1
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQW
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH
5HOD\RXWSXWV
2XWSXW
2XWSXW
2XWSXW
3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVWRYHUYROWDJHV
6KRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ
9DOXHVIRUWKHFRLOSRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQDW8Q+]
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
P$
P$
P$
+]
s
P$
9'&
212))
$SSUR[DFFRUGLQJWR',1
IURPLQWHUQDOVXSSO\'&RU
H[WHUQDO'&VXSSO\DFFRUGLQJWR',1WKURXJKWHUPLQDOVDQG,1
21581PRGH
%<3$66('
29(5/2$')$,/85( 5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFXUUHQW
s
2SHUDWLQJLQGLFDWLRQ12
%\SDVVLQGLFDWLRQ12
2YHUORDGIDXOWLQGLFDWLRQ1&12
$
$
$&$&DW9
'&DW9
3URWHFWLRQE\PHDQVRIYDULVWRUWKURXJKFRQWDFW
$J/J*RSHUDWLRQDOFODVV
$TXLFNIXVHLVQRWLQFOXGHGLQVFRSHRIVXSSO\
)DFWRU\GHIDXOW21PRGH
145
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.9
3RW40 2., 3., 4. control electronics
7\SH
5:5:5:
&RQWUROHOHFWURQLFV
2SHUDWLQJLQGLFDWLRQV
2II
6WDUW
%\SDVV
6WRS
/('
'(9,&(
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
67$7(%<3$66(')$,/85(
2II
*UHHQIODVKLQJ
*UHHQ
*UHHQIODVKLQJ
29(5/2$'
2II
2II
2II
2II
*UHHQ
<HOORZIODVKLQJ
1RWUHOHYDQW
1RWUHOHYDQW
5HGIODVKLQJ
2II
2II
2II
5HG
5HG
2II
2II
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
5HG
2II
2II
5HGIODVKLQJ
5HG
5HGIOLFNHULQJ
<HOORZ
*UHHQ
5HG
5HG
5HG
5HG
2II
2II
2II
$ODUPVLJQDOV
,PSHUPLVVLEOH,H&/$66VHWWLQJ
6WDUWLQKLELWHGWK\ULVWRUVWRRKRW
)DXOWVLJQDOV
ವ9
8[8VRU8![8V
ವ9 8[8VRU8![8V
,PSHUPLVVLEOH,H&/$66VHWWLQJ
IRUHGJHದ!RQLQSXW,1
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQWULSSLQJRYHUORDGWKHUPLVWRU
7KHUPLVWRUGHIHFWLYHZLUHEUHDNDJHVKRUWFLUFXLW
7KHUPDORYHUORDGRIWKHWK\ULVWRUV
0LVVLQJPDLQVYROWDJHSKDVHIDLOXUHPLVVLQJORDG
'HYLFHIDXOW
13.2.10
3RW40 5., 7. control electronics
7\SH
5:DQG5:
&RQWUROHOHFWURQLFV
2SHUDWLQJLQGLFDWLRQV
2II
6WDUW
%\SDVV
6WRS
/('V
'(9,&(
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
67$7(%<3$66('
2II
*UHHQIODVKLQJ
*UHHQ
*UHHQIODVKLQJ
)$,/85(
2II
2II
2II
2II
29(5/2$'
2II
2II
2II
2II
*UHHQ
<HOORZIODVKLQJ
1RWUHOHYDQW
1RWUHOHYDQW
1RWUHOHYDQW
1RWUHOHYDQW
5HGIODVKLQJ
2II
2II
2II
5HG
2II
*UHHQ
*UHHQ
2II
2II
5HG
2II
5HGIODVKLQJ
5HG
<HOORZ
*UHHQ
5HG
2II
2II
2II
5HG
5HG
5HG
2II
2II
2II
$ODUPVLJQDOV
,PSHUPLVVLEOH,H&/$66VHWWLQJ
6WDUWLQKLELWHGWK\ULVWRUVWRRKRW
)DXOWVLJQDOV
8[8VRU8![8V
,PSHUPLVVLEOH,H&/$66VHWWLQJ
IRUHGJHದ!RQLQSXW,1
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQWULSSLQJ
7KHUPDORYHUORDGRIWKHWK\ULVWRUV
0LVVLQJPDLQVYROWDJHSKDVHIDLOXUHPLVVLQJORDG
'HYLFHIDXOW
146
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.11
3RW40 protection functions
7\SH
5:
)DFWRU\GHIDXOW
3URWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQV
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQV
7ULSVLQWKHHYHQWRI
&ODVV
7ULSFODVVWR,(&
3KDVHIDLOXUHVHQVLWLYLW\
2YHUORDGZDUQLQJ
7KHUPLVWRUSURWHFWLRQDFFRUGLQJWR,(&W\SH$,(&
5HVHWRSWLRQDIWHUWULSSLQJ
5HFRYHU\WLPH
PLQ
'HYLFHSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQV
7ULSVLQWKHHYHQWRI
7KHUPDORYHUORDGLQJRIWKHPRWRU
!
1R
<HV
0DQXDODXWRPDWLFUHPRWHUHVHW
0$1$8725(027(
7KHUPDORYHUORDGLQJRIWKH
WK\ULVWRUVRUE\SDVV
0DQXDODXWRPDWLFUHPRWHUHVHW
0$1$8725(027(
5HVHWRSWLRQDIWHUWULSSLQJ
5HFRYHU\WLPH
ವ'XULQJRYHUORDGLQJRIWKHWK\ULVWRUV
ವ'XULQJRYHUORDGLQJRIWKHE\SDVV
V
V
2SWLRQDOXSWRVL]H6GHYLFHYHUVLRQ
,QWHJUDWHGUHPRWHUHVHW5(027(DYDLODEOHRQO\IRU5:WR5:
UHPRWHUHVHWZLWKDFFHVVRU\PRGXOH58DYDLODEOHIRU5:DQG5:
%\SDVVSURWHFWLRQXSWRVL]H6
13.2.12
3RW40 control times and parameters
7\SH
5:
)DFWRU\GHIDXOW
&RQWUROWLPHVDQGSDUDPHWHUV
&RQWUROWLPHV
&ORVLQJGHOD\ZLWKFRQQHFWHGFRQWUROYROWDJH
&ORVLQJGHOD\DXWRPDWLFOLQHFRQWDFWRUPRGH
5HFRYHU\WLPHFORVLQJFRPPDQGGXULQJDFWLYHVWRS
PV
PV
PV
0DLQVIDLOXUHEULGJLQJWLPH
&RQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJH
PV
V
V
0DLQVSKDVHIDLOXUHUHVSRQVHWLPH
/RDGFXUUHQWFLUFXLW
ವ'XULQJVWDUWLQJDQGVWRSSLQJ
ವ'XULQJE\SDVV
5HFORVLQJORFNRXWDIWHURYHUORDGWULS
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQWULS
'HYLFHSURWHFWLRQWULS
ವ'XULQJRYHUORDGLQJRIWKHWK\ULVWRUV
ವ'XULQJRYHUORDGLQJRIWKHE\SDVV
6WDUWSDUDPHWHUV
5DPSXSWLPH
6WDUWLQJYROWDJH
6WDUWLQJFXUUHQWOLPLWLQJ
6WRSSDUDPHWHU
5DPSGRZQWLPH
PLQ
V
V
V
[,H
[,H
V
5HVHWPRGHSDUDPHWHUVIRUPRWRUGHYLFHSURWHFWLRQWULS
0DQXDOUHVHW
/('
/('
$XWRPDWLFUHVHW
/('
5HPRWHUHVHW5(027(
2II
<HOORZ
*UHHQ
2II
5DPSXSGHWHFWLRQ
<HV
2SHUDWLQJPRGHRXWSXW
5LVLQJHGJHDW
)DOOLQJHGJHDW
6WDUWFRPPDQG
2IIFRPPDQG
5DPSGRZQHQG
21
581
21
,QWHJUDWHGUHPRWHUHVHW5(027(DYDLODEOHRQO\IRU5:WR5:
UHPRWHUHVHWZLWKDFFHVVRU\PRGXOH58DYDLODEOHIRU5:DQG5:
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
147
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.13
3RW40 2. to 7. power electronics
7\SH
5:%
5:%
5:%
5:%
5:%
5:%
5:%%
5:%%
5:%%
5:%%
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJH
7ROHUDQFH
9$&
0D[LPXPWK\ULVWRUEORFNLQJYROWDJH
9$&
5DWHGIUHTXHQF\
7ROHUDQFH
+]
s
&RQWLQXRXVGXW\DWr&RI,H
0LQLPXPORDGRIPLQLPXPVHOHFWDEOH
UDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKEHWZHHQVRIWVWDUWHUDQGPRWRU
P
3HUPLVVLEOHLQVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH
P
'HUDWLQJIURPVHHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYHVKLJKHURQUHTXHVW
DWOHDVW$
3HUPLVVLEOHPRXQWLQJSRVLWLRQ
ವ:LWKDX[LOLDU\IDQIRU5:5:
3HUPLVVLEOHDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH
2SHUDWLRQ
6WRUDJH
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
148
r
r&
r&
r
r
ದIDQLQWHJUDWHGLQWKHVRIWVWDUWHU
r
16%B
ವ:LWKRXWDX[LOLDU\IDQIRU5:5:
GHUDWLQJIURP
,3IRU5:
,3IRU5:DQG5:
,3
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.14
3RW40 24, 26, 27, 28 power electronics
5:
5:
5:
5:
$
$
$
$
ವ'XULQJRSHUDWLRQDIWHUVWDUWXSRIWKHPRWRUDWXQLQWHUUXSWHGUDWHGRSHUDWFXUU
r&DSSUR[
:
ವ'XULQJVWDUWLQJDWFXUUHQWOLPLWLQJ
,0r&
:
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWV
$
K
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWV
$
K
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWV
$
K
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWV
$
K
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWV
$
K
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWV
$
K
7\SH
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
&XUUHQWFDUU\LQJFDSDFLW\UDWHGRSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW,
H
ವ$FFWR,(&DQG8/&6$ IRUVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\$&D
$Wr&
$Wr&
$Wr&
0LQLPXPVHWWDEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0
IRUPRWRURYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
3RZHUORVV
3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQWDQGVWDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUQRUPDOVWDUWLQJFODVV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUKHDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJFODVV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUKHDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJFODVV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
0HDVXUHPHQWDWr&LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK8/&6$QRWUHTXLUHG
FXUUHQWOLPLWLQJRQVRIWVWDUWHU,07DPE r&r&
)RULQWHUPLWWHQWGXW\6ZLWK21WLPH7DPE r&r&YHUWLFDOVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\
7KHVSHFLILHGVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQFLHVGRQRWDSSO\WRDXWRPDWLFPRGH)DFWRUVIRUSHUPLVVLEOH
VZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\ZLWKGLIIHUHQWPRXQWLQJSRVLWLRQGLUHFWDVVHPEO\VLGHE\VLGHDVVHPEO\
DQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIDQRSWLRQDODGGLWLRQDOIDQVHH&RQILJXUDWLRQFKDSWHU
0D[LPXPVHWWDEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0GHSHQGLQJRQWKH&/$66VHWWLQJ
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
149
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.15
3RW40 36, 37, 38, 46, 47 power electronics
5:
5:
5:
5:
5:
$
$
$
0LQLPXPVHWWDEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0
IRUPRWRURYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
3RZHUORVV
$
ವ'XULQJRSHUDWLRQDIWHUVWDUWXSRIWKHPRWRUDWXQLQWHUUXSWHGUDWHGRSHUDWFXUU
r&DSSUR[
:
ವ'XULQJVWDUWLQJDWFXUUHQWOLPLWLQJ
,0r&
:
$
K
UDPSXSWV
$
K
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWV
$
K
$
K
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWV
$
K
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0UDPSXSWV
$
K
7\SH
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
&XUUHQWFDUU\LQJFDSDFLW\UDWHGRSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW,H
ವ$FFWR,(&DQG8/&6$IRUVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\$&D
$Wr&
$Wr&
$Wr&
3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQWDQGVWDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUQRUPDOVWDUWLQJFODVV
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUKHDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJFODVV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0
UDPSXSWV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUKHDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJFODVV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
0HDVXUHPHQWDWr&LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK8/&6$QRWUHTXLUHG
FXUUHQWOLPLWLQJRQVRIWVWDUWHU,07DPE r&r&
)RULQWHUPLWWHQWGXW\6ZLWK21WLPH7DPE r&r&YHUWLFDO
VWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\7KHVSHFLILHGVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQFLHVGRQRWDSSO\
WRDXWRPDWLFPRGH)DFWRUVIRUSHUPLVVLEOHVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\ZLWKGLIIHUHQW
PRXQWLQJSRVLWLRQGLUHFWDVVHPEO\VLGHE\VLGHDVVHPEO\DQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIDQ
RSWLRQDODGGLWLRQDOIDQVHH&RQILJXUDWLRQFKDSWHU
0D[LPXPVHWWDEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0GHSHQGLQJRQWKH&/$66VHWWLQJ
150
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.16
3RW40 55, 56, 73, 74, 75, 76 power electronics
5:
5:
5:
5:
5:
5:
$
$
$
0LQLPXPVHWWDEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0
IRUPRWRURYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQ
3RZHUORVV
$
ವ'XULQJRSHUDWLRQDIWHUVWDUWXSRIWKHPRWRUDWXQLQWHUUXSWHGUDWHGRSHUDWFXUU
r&DSSUR[
:
:
$
K
$
K
$
K
$
K
$
K
$
K
7\SH
3RZHUHOHFWURQLFV
&XUUHQWFDUU\LQJFDSDFLW\UDWHGRSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW,H
ವ$FFWR,(&DQG8/&6$IRUVWDQGDORQHDVVHPEO\$&D
$Wr&
$Wr&
$Wr&
ವ'XULQJVWDUWLQJDWFXUUHQWOLPLWLQJ
,0r&
3HUPLVVLEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQWDQGVWDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUQRUPDOVWDUWLQJFODVV
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0
UDPSXSWV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUKHDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJFODVV
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0
UDPSXSWV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
ವ)RUKHDY\GXW\VWDUWLQJFODVV
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0 UDPSXSWV
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
5DWHGPRWRUFXUU,0
6WDUWVSHUKRXU
UDPSXSWV
0HDVXUHPHQWDWr&LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK8/&6$QRWUHTXLUHG
FXUUHQWOLPLWLQJRQVRIWVWDUWHU,07DPE r&r&
)RULQWHUPLWWHQWGXW\6ZLWK21WLPH7DPE r&r&YHUWLFDOVWDQGDORQH
DVVHPEO\7KHVSHFLILHGVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQFLHVGRQRWDSSO\
WRDXWRPDWLFPRGH
0D[LPXPVHWWDEOHUDWHGPRWRUFXUUHQW,0GHSHQGLQJRQWKH&/$66
VHWWLQJ
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
151
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.17
3RW40 2., 3., 4. main conductor cross-sections
6RIWVWDUWHUV
7\SH
5:
5:
5:
&RQGXFWRUFURVVVHFWLRQV
6FUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
)URQWFODPSLQJSRLQW
FRQQHFWHG
ವ6ROLG
PP
[
[DFFRUGLQJWR
,(&
PD[[
[
[
ವ:LWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
[
[
[
[
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ದ
[
[
6ROLG
$:*
[
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHG
$:*
[
[
[
6WUDQGHG
$:*
[
ದ
ದ
ವ6ROLG
PP
ದ
[
[
ವ:LWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
ದ
[
[
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ದ
[
[
ವ$:*FDEOHV
5HDUFODPSLQJSRLQW
FRQQHFWHG
ವ$:*FDEOHV
$:*
ದ
[
ದ
[
[
[
ವ:LWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
PP
ದ
[
[
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ದ
[
[
$:*
ದ
[
[
1P
OELQ
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHG
%RWKFODPSLQJSRLQWV
FRQQHFWHG
ವ6ROLG
ವ$:*FDEOHV
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHG
ವ7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
6SULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
7RROV
3=
3=
$OOHQVFUHZPP
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
,3
,3
WHUPLQDOFRPSDUWPHQW,3
,3
WHUPLQDOFRPSDUWPHQW,3
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
ವ6ROLG
PP
ದ
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
HQGVOHHYHV
ZLWKRXWSODVWLFFROODU
ದ
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHGILQHO\VWUDQGHG
$:*
ದ
6WUDQGHG
$:*
[
ದ
ವ$:*FDEOHV
%XVEDUFRQQHFWLRQV
7RROV
',1,62$[ ದ
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
,3
ದ
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
ವ:LWKFDEOHOXJDFFRUGLQJWR',1RU
PPZLGH
6WUDQGHG
PP
ದ
)LQHO\VWUDQGHG
PP
ದ
[
[
$:*
ದ
[
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
152
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.18
3RW40 5., 7. main conductor cross-sections
6RIWVWDUWHUV
7\SH
5:
5:
&RQGXFWRUFURVVVHFWLRQV
6FUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
57*N:
57*
PP
0LQ[[
0D[[[
NFPLO
:LWKER[WHUPLQDO
)URQWFODPSLQJSRLQW
FRQQHFWHG
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ವ5LEERQFDEOHFRQGXFWRUVQXPEHU[ZLGWK[WKLFNQHVV PP
5HDUFODPSLQJSRLQW
FRQQHFWHG
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
$:*
0LQ[[
0D[[[
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
0LQ[[
0D[[[
NFPLO
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ವ5LEERQFDEOHFRQGXFWRUVQXPEHU[ZLGWK[WKLFNQHVV PP
%RWKFODPSLQJSRLQWV
FRQQHFWHG
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
$:*
0LQ[[
0D[[[
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
0D[[[
0LQ[PD[[
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
0D[[
0D[[PD[[
$:*
0D[[[[
0D[[
0D[[[[
0LQ[PD[[NFPLO
1P
OELQ
0KH[DJRQVRFNHW$)
0KH[DJRQVRFNHW$)
ವ5LEERQFDEOHFRQGXFWRUVQXPEHU[ZLGWK[WKLFNQHVV PP
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
ವ7HUPLQDOVFUHZV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
6FUHZWHUPLQDOV
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
:LWKER[WHUPLQDO
)URQWRUUHDUFODPSLQJ
SRLQWFRQQHFWHG
57*
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
PP
ವ5LEERQFDEOHFRQGXFWRUVQXPEHU[ZLGWK[WKLFNQHVV PP
%RWKFODPSLQJSRLQWV
FRQQHFWHG
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
$:*
0LQ[[
0D[[[
NFPLO
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
0D[[[
ವ6WUDQGHG
PP
ವ5LEERQFDEOHFRQGXFWRUVQXPEHU[ZLGWK[WKLFNQHVV PP
$:*
0D[[[[
0D[[
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKFDEOHOXJ
ವ6WUDQGHGZLWKFDEOHOXJ
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
PP
PP
$:*
NFPLO
NFPLO
ವ&RQQHFWLQJEDUPD[ZLGWK
ವ7HUPLQDOVFUHZV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
PP
0[$)
0[$)
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
6FUHZWHUPLQDOV
0D[[
0DLQFRQGXFWRUV
:LWKRXWER[WHUPLQDOEXVEDUFRQQHFWLRQ
:KHQFRQQHFWLQJFDEOHOXJVWR',1XVH57($WHUPLQDO
FRYHUIRUFRQGXFWRUFURVVVHFWLRQVIURPPPtWRHQVXUHWKHUHTXLUHG
FOHDUDQFHEHWZHHQSKDVHV
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
1P
OELQ
:KHQFRQQHFWLQJFDEOHOXJVWR',1RU',1XVH57
($WHUPLQDOFRYHUIRUFRQGXFWRUFURVVVHFWLRQVIURPPPtRU
PPtUHVSHFWLYHO\WRHQVXUHWKHUHTXLUHGFOHDUDQFHEHWZHHQSKDVHV
153
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.19
3RW40 .. auxiliary conductor cross-sections
6RIWVWDUWHUV
5:
7\SH
&RQGXFWRUFURVVVHFWLRQV
$X[LOLDU\FRQGXFWRUVRUFRQGXFWRUVFDQEHFRQQHFWHG
6FUHZWHUPLQDOV
ವ6ROLG
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
PP
PP
[
[
ವ$:*FDEOHV
6ROLGRUVWUDQGHG
)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
$:*
$:*
[
[
1P
OELQ
6SULQJORDGHGWHUPLQDOV
ವ6ROLG
5:bWR5:b
5:5:
PP
PP
[
[
ವ)LQHO\VWUDQGHGZLWKHQGVOHHYH
ವ$:*FDEOHVVROLGRUVWUDQGHG
PP
$:*
[
[IRU5:5:
[IRU5:DQG5:
ವ7HUPLQDOVFUHZV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
13.2.20
Electromagnetic compatibility according to EN 60947-4-2
6WDQGDUG
3DUDPHWHUV
(OHFWURVWDWLFGLVFKDUJH(6'
(1
sN9FRQWDFWGLVFKDUJHsN9DLUGLVFKDUJH
(OHFWURPDJQHWLF5)ILHOGV
(1
)UHTXHQF\UDQJHWR0+]ZLWKDWN+]
'HJUHHRIVHYHULW\9P
&RQGXFWHG5)LQWHUIHUHQFH
(1
)UHTXHQF\UDQJHN+]0+]ZLWKDWN+]
,QWHUIHUHQFH9
ವ%XUVW
(1
sN9N+]
ವ6XUJH
(1
sN9OLQHWROLQH
sN9OLQHWRJURXQG
(0&LQWHUIHUHQFHILHOGVWUHQJWK
(1
5DGLRLQWHUIHUHQFHYROWDJH
(1
/LPLWYDOXHRI&ODVV$DW0+]
/LPLWYDOXHRI&ODVV%IRU5:9$&'&
/LPLWYDOXHRI&ODVV$DW0+]
/LPLWYDOXHRI&ODVV%IRU5:9$&'&
(OHFWURPDJQHWLFFRPSDWLELOLW\DFFRUGLQJWR(1b
(0&LQWHUIHUHQFHLPPXQLW\
5)YROWDJHVDQG5)FXUUHQWVRQFDEOHV
(0&LQWHUIHUHQFHHPLVVLRQ
5DGLRLQWHUIHUHQFHVXSSUHVVLRQILOWHUV
'HJUHHRIQRLVHVXSSUHVVLRQ$LQGXVWULDODSSOLFDWLRQV
'HJUHHRIQRLVHVXSSUHVVLRQ%DSSOLFDWLRQVIRUUHVLGHQWLDODUHDV
&RQWUROYROWDJH
ವ9$&'&
ವ9$&
ವ9$&'&
1RWUHTXLUHG
1RWDYDLODEOH
1RWDYDLODEOH
1RWUHTXLUHGIRU5:
5HTXLUHGIRU5:DQG5:VHHWDEOH
'HJUHHRIQRLVHVXSSUHVVLRQ%FDQQRWEHREWDLQHGWKURXJKWKHXVHRI
ILOWHUVDVWKHVWUHQJWKRIWKHHOHFWURPDJQHWLFILHOGLVQRWDWWHQXDWHGE\WKHILOWHU
154
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.21
Recommended filters
6RIWVWDUWHUW\SHV
1RPLQDOFXUUHQW
5HFRPPHQGHGILOWHUV
6RIWVWDUWHUV
9ROWDJHUDQJHWR9
)LOWHUW\SHV
$
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
()$$
()$$
()$$
()$$
()$$
1RPLQDOFXUUHQWILOWHUV
$
7HUPLQDOV
PP
7KHUDGLRLQWHUIHUHQFHVXSSUHVVLRQILOWHULVXVHGWRUHPRYHWKHFRQGXFWHG
LQWHUIHUHQFHIURPWKHPDLQFLUFXLW7KHILHOGUHODWHGHPLVVLRQVFRPSO\
ZLWKGHJUHHRIQRLVHVXSSUHVVLRQ%7KHILOWHUVKRXOGEHVHOHFWHGXQGHUVWDQGDUGFRQGLWLRQV
VWDUWVSHUKRXUUDPSXSWLPHVDW,H
13.2.22
Types of coordination
Types of coordination
The type of coordination according to which the motor feeder with soft starter is mounted
depends on the application-specific requirements. Normally, fuseless mounting (combination
of motor starter protector and soft starter) is sufficient. If type of coordination 2 needs to be
fulfilled, semiconductor fuses must be fitted in the motor feeder.
ToC
1
ToC
2
Type of coordination 1 in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1:
The device is defective following a short-circuit failure and therefore unsuitable for
further use (personnel and equipment must not be put at risk).
Type of coordination 2 in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1:
The device is suitable for further use following a short-circuit failure (personnel and
equipment must not be put at risk).
The type of coordination only refers to soft starters in conjunction with the stipulated
protective device (motor starter protector / fuse), not to additional components in the
feeder.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
155
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.23
Fuseless version
)XVHOHVVYHUVLRQ
4
0
a
16%B
4
6RIWVWDUWHUV 1RPL 0RWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRUV
7R&
9
QDO
FXUUHQW
4
4
7\SH
$
7\SH
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ
9
5DWHG
FXUUHQW
9
5DWHG
FXUUHQW
4
,TPD[
4
,TPD[
7\SH
N$
$
7\SH
N$
$
59.& 59$&
59$&
LQVL]H6
59'& 59'&
59(& 59(&
59)& 59)&
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
59.$ 59$$
59$$
LQVL]H6
59'$ 59'$
59($ 59($
59)$ 59)$
5:b
5:b
5:b
59*$
59-$
59.$
59*&
59-&
59.&
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
59/$
590$
59/&
590&
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
9/'&
9/'&
9/'&
9/'&
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
9/'&
9/'&
9/'&
9/'&
9/'&
9/'&
9/'&
9/'&
1)
The rated motor current must be
considered when selecting the devices. The
3RV13 and 3RV23 motor starter protectors
are used for starter combinations (without
motor protection). In this case, motor
protection is provided by the 3RW40 soft
starter.
156
2)
The types of coordination are described in
chapter Types of coordination [Page 155].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.24
Fused version (line protection only)
)XVHGYHUVLRQOLQHSURWHFWLRQRQO\
)
4
0
a
6RIWVWDUWHUV
7R&
1RPLQDO
FXUUHQW
16%B
4
/LQHSURWHFWLRQPD[LPXP
/LQHFRQWDFWRUV
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
4
)
$
$
7\SH
7\SH
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
RSWLRQDO
4
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
1$
1$
57
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
1$
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
57
57
5:b
5:b
1$
1$
57$
57$
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
[1$
[1$
[1$
[1$
[
[
[
[
57$
57$
57$
57$
5757LQVL]H6
57
57
57
1)
The types of coordination are described in chapter Types of coordination [Page 155].
Type of coordination 1 only refers to soft starters in conjunction with the stipulated protective
device (motor starter protector / fuse), not to additional components in the feeder.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
157
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.25
Fused version with SITOR 3NE1 fuses
Assembly as for type of coordination 2, with SITOR all-range fuses (F´1) for combined
thyristor and line protection.
)XVHGYHUVLRQZLWK6,7251(IXVHVVHPLFRQGXFWRUDQGOLQHSURWHFWLRQ
)RUVXLWDEOHIXVHEDVHVUHIHUWR6(17521VZLWFKLQJDQGSURWHFWLQJGHYLFHVIRUSRZHUGLVWULEXWLRQದದ!
6ZLWFKGLVFRQQHFWRUVWKH/9&DWDORJDQGWR%(7$SURWHFWLQJದದ!6,725VHPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVLQ
WKH(7%&DWDORJRUFRQVXOWZZZVLHPHQVGHVLWRU
)ಬ
4
0
a
6RIWVWDUWHUV
7R&
4
7\SH
1RPLQDO
FXUUHQW
$
16%B
4
/LQHFRQWDFWRUV
$OOUDQJHIXVHV
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
)ಬ
7\SH
RSWLRQDO
4
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
1(
57
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
57
57
57
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
57
57
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
57$
57$
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
1(
57$
57$
57$
57$
57
57
57
57
1)
The types of coordination are described in chapter Types of coordination [Page 155].
Type of coordination 2 only refers to soft starters in conjunction with the stipulated protective
device (motor starter protector / fuse), not to additional components in the feeder.
158
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.26
Fused version with SITOR 3NE3/4/8 fuses
Assembly as for type of coordination 2, with additional SITOR fuses (F3) for thyristor
protection only.
)XVHGYHUVLRQZLWK1(6,725IXVHVVHPLFRQGXFWRUSURWHFWLRQE\IXVHOLQHDQGRYHUORDGSURWHFWLRQE\PRWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRU
DOWHUQDWLYHO\LQVWDOODWLRQZLWKFRQWDFWRUDQGRYHUORDGUHOD\SRVVLEOH
)RUVXLWDEOHIXVHEDVHVUHIHUWRXQGHU6(17521
VZLWFKLQJDQGSURWHFWLQJGHYLFHVIRUSRZHUGLVWULEXWLRQದದ!
6ZLWFKGLVFRQQHFWRUVLQWKH/9&DWDORJDQGWR%(7$
SURWHFWLQJದದ!6,725VHPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVLQWKH(7%
&DWDORJRUFRQVXOWZZZVLHPHQVGHVLWRU
)
)
4
4
)
4
6RIWVWDUWHUV
7R&
4
7\SH
1RPLQDO
FXUUHQW
$
0
a
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPLQLPXP
5DWHGFXUUHQW
)
7\SH
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPD[LPXP
5DWHGFXUUHQW
6L]H
)
7\SH
$
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
ದ
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
ದ
ದ
5:b ದ
ದ
5:b ದ
ದ
5:b ದ
ದ
5:b 16%B
0
a
16%B
4
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPLQLPXP
6L]H
5DWHGFXUUHQW
6L]H
)
7\SH
$
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
5:b
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
1(%
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
6RIWVWDUWHUV 1RPLQDO
7R&
FXUUHQW
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPD[
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPLQ
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
4
)
$
7\SH
$
7\SH
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
6HPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHVPD[
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
)
7\SH
$
&\OLQGULFDOIXVHV
5DWHGFXUUHQW 6L]H
)
7\SH
$
)
7\SH
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
ದ
ದ
ದ
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1(
1&
1&
1&
1&
1&
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1( 1( 1(
1(
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
5DWHG
FXUUHQW
$
159
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
6RIWVWDUWHUV 1RPL /LQHFRQWDFWRUV
7R&
QDO
RSWLRQDO
FXUUHQW
4
4
7\SH
$
7\SHRIFRRUGLQDWLRQ,T N$DW9
0RWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRUV
$
4
7\SH
$
/LQHSURWHFWLRQPD[LPXP
5DWHG
FXUUHQW
)
7\SH
$
ದ
ದ
1$
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1$
1$
1$
5DWHG
FXUUHQW
9
4
7\SH
9
5DWHG
FXUUHQW
6L]H
5:b
57
5:b
5:b
5:b
57
57
57
57 59.$
57
LQVL]H6
57 59'$
57 59($
57 59)$
5:b
5:b
5:b
57
57
57
59*$
59-$
59.$
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1$
1$
1$
5:b
5:b
57
57
59/$
590$
ದ
ದ
ದ
ದ
1$
1$
5:b
5:b
57$
57$
9/
9/
9/
9/
1$
1$
5:b
5:b
5:b
5:b
57$
57$
57$
57$
9/
9/
9/
9/
9/
9/
9/
9/
[1$
[1$
[1$
[1$
[
[
[
[
59$$
59$$
LQVL]H6
59'$
59($
59)$
1)
The types of coordination are described in chapter Types of coordination [Page 155].
Type of coordination 2 only refers to soft starters in conjunction with the stipulated protective
device (motor starter protector / fuse), not to additional components in the feeder.
160
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Technical data
13.2 3RW40
13.2.27
Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW40 (with symmetry)
16%BD
7ULSSLQJWLPHW>V@
&ODVV
13.2.28
&ODVV
[,H
&ODVV
Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW40 (with asymmetry)
16%B
7ULSSLQJWLPHW>V@
&ODVV
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
&ODVV
[,H
&ODVV
161
Technical data
13.3 Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation software
13.3
Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation software
This software can be used to simulate and select all SIEMENS soft starters, taking into
account various parameters such as the supply system conditions, motor data, load data,
specific application requirements, etc.
It is a useful tool, which does away with the need for time-consuming and complex manual
calculations if you need to select the optimum soft starter for your particular case.
The Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation software can be downloaded from (http://
www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/low-voltage/en/industrial-controls/controls/solid-stateswitching-devices/soft/software/Pages/default.aspx)
More information about soft starters can likewise be found on the Internet at (http://
www.siemens.com/softstarter)
162
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
14
Dimension drawings
14.1
3RW30 for standard applications
E
G
H
K
I
F
D
P
O
J
16%B
N
L
7\SHGLPHQVLRQVPP D
G
H
I
J
K
5:
5:
E
5:
5:
5:
5:
'LVWDQFHVIURPJURXQGHGSDUWVPP
/DWHUDO
7RS
%RWWRP
)L[LQJVFUHZV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXHV1P
5:
5:
5:
5:
0
0
0
0
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
F
L
N
O
P
163
Dimension drawings
14.2 3RW40 for standard applications
14.2
3RW40 for standard applications
E
G
H
K
I
P
F
D
O
J
16%BD
N
L
7\SHGLPHQVLRQVPP D
E
G
H
I
J
K
L
N
O
P
5:
5:
5:
5:
'LVWDQFHVIURPJURXQGHGSDUWVPP
F
7RS
%RWWRP
)L[LQJVFUHZV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXHV1P
5:
0
5:
0
5:
0
164
/DWHUDO
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Dimension drawings
14.2 3RW40 for standard applications
7\SHGLPHQVLRQVPP D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
5:
01P
5:
01P
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
165
Dimension drawings
14.2 3RW40 for standard applications
166
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
15
Typical circuit diagrams
15.1
Typical circuit for the optional thermistor motor protection
evaluation
A thermistor motor protection evaluation function is optionally available for the 24 V AC/DC
control voltage version of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4.
Note
If a thermistor is connected (PTC type A or Klixon), you must remove the copper jumper
between terminals T11/21 and T22.
7\SH$37&
7KHUPRFOLFN
77
4
7
Figure 15-1
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
7
77
4
7
7
Optional thermistor motor protection evaluation
167
Typical circuit diagrams
15.2 Control by pushbutton
15.2
Control by pushbutton
15.2.1
Control of the 3RW30 by pushbutton
/
)
4
,!! ,!! ,!!
4
6
0RWRU
VWDUW
21
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
4
5:
6
0RWRU
VWRS
6WDUW
0
$
4
$
0
1
Figure 15-2
Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
(2) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
WARNING
(3) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal. An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command
is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
168
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.2 Control by pushbutton
15.2.2
Control of the 3RW40 by pushbutton
/
)
4
6
5(6(7
!V
,!!
%<3$66('
21
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
6
0RWRU
VWDUW
4
5:
6
0RWRU
VWRS
1
,!!
,!!
4
Figure 15-3
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
0
6WDUW
$
4
$
/
0
Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main
circuit
/
)
1
6
0RWRU
VWDUW
%<3$66('
21
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
6
0RWRU
VWRS
(
4
(
Figure 15-4
$
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
6
5(6(7
WRV
$
Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
(2) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
169
Typical circuit diagrams
15.3 Control by switch
15.3
Control by switch
15.3.1
Control of the 3RW30 by switch
/
)
4
,!!
4
,!!
,!!
6
21
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
$
4
$
6WDUW
5:
8
9
0
1
Figure 15-5
:
+
0
Wiring of the control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal. An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command
is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
170
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.3 Control by switch
15.3.2
Control of the 3RW40 by switch
/
)
4
,!!
,!!
,!!
21581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
6WDUW
%<3$66('
4
6
$
4
$
4
5:
)DXOW
6
5(6(7
!V
+
+
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
0
+
0
1
Figure 15-6
/
Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main
circuit
)
6
5(6(7
WRV
$
%<3$66('
)DXOW
(
4
(
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
6
21581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
+
+
+
$
1
Figure 15-7
Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
171
Typical circuit diagrams
15.4 Control in automatic mode
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
15.4
Control in automatic mode
15.4.1
Control of the 3RW30 in automatic mode
/
)
4
,!!
,!!
,!!
4
6
212))
21
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9
:
4
$
4
$
6WDUW
5:
+
1
0
Figure 15-8
0
Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
172
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.4 Control in automatic mode
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal. An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command
is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
15.4.2
Control of the 3RW40 in automatic mode
/
)
4
6
212))
5(6(7
!V
1
,!!
%<3$66('
21581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
)DXOW
+
+
+
4
5:
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
,!!
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
0
Figure 15-9
,!!
4
6WDUW
$
4
$
0
Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main
circuit
173
Typical circuit diagrams
15.4 Control in automatic mode
/
)
6
21
6
5(6(7 2))
WRV
$
+
%<3$66('
21581
+
+
$
)DXOW
1
(
4
(
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
Figure 15-10 Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
Note
(4) Idle time until restart.
Owing to the intrinsic protection (3RW), an idle time of at least five minutes must be allowed
prior to restarting if the device is switched on and off by means of the control voltage under
field conditions.
Us
ON
OFF
174
> 5 min
t
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.5 Control by PLC
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
15.5
Control by PLC
15.5.1
Control of the 3RW30 with 24 V DC by PLC
9'&
/
)
4
3/&
2XWSXW
29(5/2$'
21
,!!
4
,!!
,!!
4
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
4
5:
3/&
,QSXW
0
$
4
$
6WDUW
0
0
Figure 15-11 Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal. An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command
is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
175
Typical circuit diagrams
15.5 Control by PLC
15.5.2
Control of the 3RW40 by PLC
9'&
/
)
4
.
5(6(7
!V
,!!
%<3$66('
21581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
,!!
,!!
4
4
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
9'&
3/&
2XWSXW
0
3/&
,QSXW
$
4
$
0
6WDUW
0
.
1
&RXSOLQJUHOD\FRQWUROIRU
5(6(7!VHF
Figure 15-12 Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control circuit (with 24 V control voltage) and the
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main circuit
/
)
6
5(6(7
WRV
%<3$66('
21581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
3/&
2XWSXW
3/&
,QSXW
0
(
4
(
$
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
9'&
$
1
Figure 15-13 Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
176
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.6 Control with an optional main / line contactor
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
15.6
Control with an optional main / line contactor
15.6.1
Control of the 3RW30 with a main contactor
/
)
4
,!!
6
4
,!!
,!!
4
21
/
/
/
7
7
7
$
4
$
1
6WDUW
4
5:
$
4
$
8
0
9
:
0
Figure 15-14 Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
177
Typical circuit diagrams
15.6 Control with an optional main / line contactor
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal. An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command
is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
15.6.2
Control of the 3RW40 with a main contactor
/
)
4
%<3$66('
581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
6
)DXOW
$
4
$
,!!
,!!
,!!
4
6WDUW
6
5(6(7
!V
+
4
+
4
4
5:
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
1
0
0
Figure 15-15 Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main
circuit
178
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.6 Control with an optional main / line contactor
/
)
6
5(6(7
WRV
(
4
(
$
$
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
+
581
%<3$66('
6
)DXOW
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
4
+
1
Figure 15-16 Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit
Note
If a soft stop is required, the function of output 13/14 must be reparameterized to "RUN"
(refer to Commissioning the 3RW40 [Page 98]).
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
179
Typical circuit diagrams
15.7 Reversing circuit
15.7
Reversing circuit
15.7.1
3RW30 reversing circuit
/
)
)
4
,!! ,!! ,!!
.
4
21
4
6
6
0RWRU
&:
4
6
6
6
6
0RWRU
0RWRU 0RWRU
&&: 4 &:
&&:
4
.
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
4
5:
4
4
6
0RWRU
VWRS
$
4
$
6WDUW
0
8
8
$
4
$
$
4
$
$
.
0
8
$
Figure 15-17
0RWRU
&&:
0RWRU
&:
1
Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal. An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command
is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
180
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.7 Reversing circuit
15.7.2
/
3RW40 reversing circuit
)
4
,!!
,!!
,!!
%<3$66('
4
21581
.
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
6
5(6(7
!V
4
6
6
6
6
0RWRU
0RWRU 0RWRU
&&:
&&: 4
&:
6
6
0RWRU
4
&:
4
.
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
5:
4
4
6
0RWRU
6WRS
$
+
4
)DXOW
Figure 15-18
$
8
$
8
0
0
.
4
$
1
8
9 :
$
$
0RWRU
&&:
0RWRU
&:
$
4
$
6WDUW
8
Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 5 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main circuit
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
181
Typical circuit diagrams
15.7 Reversing circuit
/
)
6
5(6(7
WRV
%<3$66('
6
6
6
6
0RWRU
0RWRU 0RWRU
4
&&:
&&:
&:
6
6
0RWRU
4
&:
+
4
$
$
4
8
4
$
6
0RWRU
VWRS
8
$
.
$
0RWRU
&:
$
)DXOW
1
(
4
(
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
4
.
$
8
$
0RWRU
&&:
.
21581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
Figure 15-19 Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
NOTICE
No soft stop possible. Set the ramp-down time to 0 s with the potentiometer.
182
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.8 Control of a magnetic parking brake
15.8
Control of a magnetic parking brake
15.8.1
3RW30 motor with magnetic parking brake
/
)
4
,!!
4
4
29(5/2$'
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
5:
%UDNH
6WDUW
8
$
4
$
,!!
21
6
,!!
9 :
0
0
+
1
29(5/2$'
Figure 15-20 Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal. An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command
is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
183
Typical circuit diagrams
15.8 Control of a magnetic parking brake
15.8.2
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4, control of a motor with a magnetic parking brake
/
4
)
,!!
6
5(6(7
!V
,!!
,!!
%<3$66('
21
6
29(5/2$'
4
4
5:
/
/
/
7
7
7
1
6WDUW
$
4
$
%UDNH
8 9 :
0
0
+
)DXOW
Figure 15-21 Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control / main circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
NOTICE
No soft stop possible. Set the ramp-down time to 0 s with the potentiometer.
184
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.8 Control of a magnetic parking brake
15.8.3
3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7, control of a motor with a magnetic parking brake
/
)
4
,!!
6
5(6(7
WRV
%<3$66('
21
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
/
/
/
7
7
7
8
9 :
4
5:
%UDNH
$
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
1
,!!
4
6
(
4
(
,!!
0
0
+
$
)DXOW
Figure 15-22 Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control / main circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
NOTICE
No soft stop possible. Set the ramp-down time to 0 s with the potentiometer.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
185
Typical circuit diagrams
15.9 Emergency stop
15.9
Emergency stop
15.9.1
3RW30 emergency stop and 3TK2823 safety relay
/b9b'&
6 2Q
7.UHVHW
4
6
(PHUJHQF\
VWRS
4
<
<
<
<
<
$
<
7.&%
$
4 4
0
Figure 15-23 Wiring of the emergency stop control circuit and the 3TK28 safety relay
/
)
4
6
6WDUW
6WRS
5:
4
,!!
21
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
5:
4
4
8
6WDUW
4
,!!
4
4
$
4
$
,!!
4
+
+
0
9 :
0
1
0RWRU
2YHUORDG
(PHUJHQF\VWRS
Figure 15-24 Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
186
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.9 Emergency stop
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
- If the 3TK28 is reset
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal.
An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command is present at the
input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
15.9.2
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 emergency stop and 3TK2823 safety relay
/b9b'&
6 2Q
7.5(6(7
4
6
(PHUJHQF\
VWRS
4
<
<
<
<
<
$
<
7.&%
$
4 4
0
Figure 15-25 Wiring of the emergency stop control circuit and the 3TK28 safety relay
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
187
Typical circuit diagrams
15.9 Emergency stop
/
)
4
%<3$66('
21581
6
6WDUW
VWRS
5:
,!!
,!!
6WDUW
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
5:
4
4
4
4
4
$
4
$
,!!
4
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
6
5(6(7
!V
4
8
+
+
0
9 :
0
1
)DXOW
1RFRQWUROYROWDJH
5:
(PHUJHQF\VWRS
Figure 15-26 Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main
circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command (3TK or 3RW) if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if
the motor protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group
fault output (terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
NOTICE
If the soft stop function is set (ramp-down time potentiometer set to >0 s) and the emergency
stop circuit is tripped, a "Missing load voltage, phase failure / missing load" fault may be
indicated on the soft starter. In this case, the soft starter must be reset according to the
selected RESET MODE.
188
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.9 Emergency stop
15.9.3
3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 emergency stop and 3TK2823 safety relay
/b9b'&
6 2Q
7.
5(6(7
4
6
(PHUJHQF\
VWRS
4
<
<
<
<
<
$
<
7.&%
$
4 4
0
Figure 15-27 Wiring of the emergency stop control circuit and the 3TK28 safety relay
/
)
4
6
5:5(6(7
WRV
,!!
,!!
,!!
%<3$66('
21581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
4
4
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
5:
1
Figure 15-28
4
4
8
4
0
4
(
4
(
$
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
6
6WDUW
6WRS
5:
+
9 :
0
+
$
)DXOW
5:
(PHUJHQ
F\VWRS
Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
189
Typical circuit diagrams
15.9 Emergency stop
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command (3TK or 3RW) if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if
the motor protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group
fault output (terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
NOTICE
If the soft stop function is set (ramp-down time potentiometer set to >0 s) and the emergency
stop circuit is tripped, a "Missing load voltage, phase failure / missing load" fault may be
indicated on the soft starter. In this case, the soft starter must be reset according to the
selected RESET MODE.
190
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.10 3RW and contactor for emergency starting
15.10
3RW and contactor for emergency starting
15.10.1
3RW30 and contactor for emergency starting
/
)
6HOHFWRUVZLWFK
6RIWVWDUW
)
4
,!!
,!!
,!!
4
6
/
/
/
21
4
5:
4
7
7
7
$
4
$
6WDUW
6WDUWVWRS
'LUHFWVWDUWLQJ
$
+
4
8
$
1
'LUHFWVWDUWHU
FRQWDFWRU
8
0
9 :
0
Figure 15-29 Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to
Troubleshooting chapter) are automatically reset when the system returns to normal. An
automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
191
Typical circuit diagrams
15.10 3RW and contactor for emergency starting
15.10.2
/
3RW40 and contactor for emergency starting
)
4
6HOHFWRUVZLWFK
6RIWVWDUW
,!!
,!!
21581
%<3$66('
4
6
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
6
5(6(7
V
,!!
4
5:
/
/
/
4
7
7
7
8
9 :
1
$
4
$
6WDUW
6WDUWVWRS
'LUHFWVWDUWLQJ
+
+
$
+
0
0
$
'LUHFWVWDUWHU
FRQWDFWRU
)DXOW
Figure 15-30
8
4
Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main circuit
/
)
6HOHFWRUVZLWFK
6RIWVWDUW
6
5(6(7
WRV
1
'LUHFWVWDUWLQJ
%<3$66('
21581
29(5/2$'
)$,/85(
4
6WDUWVWRS
'LUHFWVWDUWLQJ
$
6WDUW
6
(
4
(
+
+
+
$
4
8
$
$
)DXOW
'LUHFWVWDUWHU
FRQWDFWRU
Figure 15-31 Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit
192
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.10 3RW and contactor for emergency starting
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
193
Typical circuit diagrams
15.11 Dahlander / multispeed motor
15.11
Dahlander / multispeed motor
15.11.1
3RW30 and Dahlander motor starting
/
)RUPRWRURYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQ
VHWUDWHGFXUUHQW
IRUKLJKVSHHG
4
4
4
)
4
,!! ,!! ,!!
)RUPRWRURYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQ
VHWUDWHGFXUUHQW
IRUORZVSHHG
.
4
0
4
4
4
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
ORZVSHHG
1
$
4
$
$
4
$
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
KLJKVSHHG
$
.
$
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
KLJKVSHHG
$
4
$
)DXOW
8 9 :
8 9 :
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFWRUIRU
VZLWFKRYHUGHOD\
UHVSRQVHGHOD\PV
6WDUW
4
)
HJ5%
0
4
Figure 15-32
7
4
6
6WDUW
+LJK
VSHHG
+
7 7
4
6
6WDUW
/RZVSHHG
/
4
5:
6
0RWRUVWRS
$
4
$
/ /
21
4
)
Wiring of the 3RW30 control and main circuits
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart. Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
Faults caused by incorrect control voltage, a missing load, or a phase failure (refer to chapter
3RW30: LEDs and troubleshooting [Page 44]) are automatically reset when the system
returns to normal. An automatic restart is initiated and the 3RW restarted if a start command
is present at the input.
If you do not want the motor to start automatically, you must integrate suitable additional
components, e.g. phase failure or load monitoring devices, into the control and main circuits.
194
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.11 Dahlander / multispeed motor
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
15.11.2
4
)
4
4
6
5(6(7
!V
,!!
,!!
,!!
4
%<3$66('
)
21581
/
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 and Dahlander motor starting
)RUPRWRURYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQ
VHWUDWHGFXUUHQW
IRUKLJKVSHHG
6
0RWRU
VWRS
6
6WDUW
/RZVSHHG
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
5:
4
)RUPRWRURYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQ
VHWUDWHGFXUUHQW
IRUORZVSHHG
.
4
4
)
HJ5%
8
9 :
4
6
6WDUW
+LJK
VSHHG
0
8
Figure 15-33
4
$
4
$
$
4
$
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
KLJKVSHHG
$
.
$
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
KLJKVSHHG
+
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
ORZVSHHG
$
4
$
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFWRUIRU
VZLWFKRYHUGHOD\
UHVSRQVHGHOD\PV
6WDUW
4
)DXOW
1
9 :
4
4
$
4
$
0
Wiring of the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4 control circuit and the 3RW40 2 to 3RW40 7 main circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
195
Typical circuit diagrams
15.11 Dahlander / multispeed motor
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
For the optional thermistor motor protection evaluation, refer to Typical circuit for the optional
thermistor motor protection evaluation [Page 167].
NOTICE
No soft stop possible. Set the ramp-down time to 0 s with the potentiometer.
196
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Typical circuit diagrams
15.11 Dahlander / multispeed motor
15.11.3
3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 and Dahlander motor starting
/
)
6
5(6(7
WRV
4
)
%<3$66('
21581
4
4
6
0RWRUVWRS
6
6WDUW
/RZVSHHG
.
4
$
4
$
+
$
$
.
$
$
4
$
$
4
$
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
KLJKVSHHG
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
KLJKVSHHG
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFWRUIRU
VZLWFKRYHUGHOD\
UHVSRQVHGHOD\PV
$
4
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
ORZVSHHG
(
4
(
4
4
)DXOW
1
4
6WDUW
58$
UHPRWH5(6(7
6
6WDUW
+LJK
VSHHG
Figure 15-34 Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 control circuit
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
197
Typical circuit diagrams
15.11 Dahlander / multispeed motor
4
,!!
)RUPRWRURYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQ
VHWUDWHGFXUUHQW
IRUKLJKVSHHG
,!!
,!!
/
/
/
7
7
7
4
5:
4
)RUPRWRURYHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQ
VHWUDWHGFXUUHQW
IRUORZVSHHG
4
)
]%5%
8
9 :
4
0
8
0
9 :
Figure 15-35 Wiring of the 3RW40 5 to 3RW40 7 main circuit
(1) For the permissible values for the main and control voltage (dependent on the MLFB),
refer to chapter Technical data [Page 121] .
WARNING
(2) Automatic restart.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
The start command (e.g. issued by the PLC or switch S1) must be reset prior to issuing a
RESET command because the motor attempts to restart again automatically following this
RESET command if a start command is still present. This particularly applies if the motor
protection has tripped. For safety reasons, you are advised to integrate the group fault output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
(3) Alternatively, the motor feeder can be assembled as a fuseless or fused version with type
of coordination 1 or 2. For the assignment of fuses and switching devices, refer to chapter
Technical data [Page 121]
NOTICE
No soft stop possible. Set the ramp-down time to 0 s with the potentiometer.
198
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
16
Accessories
16.1
Box terminal blocks for soft starters
For soft starter type
Size
Version
Order No.
Box terminal blocks for soft starters for round and ribbon cables
3RW40 5.
3RW40 7.
16.2
S6
•
S12
3RT19 55-4G
Max. 70 mm2
•
Max. 120 mm
2
3RT19 56-4G
•
Max. 240 mm2
3RT19 66-4G
Auxiliary conductor terminals
For soft starter type
Size
Order No.
S3
3RT19 46-4F
Size
Order No.
Auxiliary conductor terminals, 3-pole
3RW30 4.
3RW40 4.
16.3
Covers for soft starters
For soft starter type
Terminal covers for box terminals
Additional touch protection to be fitted at the box terminals (2 units required per device)
3RW30 3.
S2
3RT19 36-4EA2
S3
3RT19 46-4EA2
3RW40 5.
S6
3RT19 56-4EA2
3RW40 7.
S12
3RT19 66-4EA2
3RW40 3.
3RW30 4.
3RW40 4.
Terminal covers for cable lug and busbar connections
For complying with the phase clearances and as touch protection if box terminal is removed
(2 units required per contactor)
3RW30 4.
S3
3RT19 46-4EA1
3RW40 5.
S6
3RT19 56-4EA1
3RW40 7.
S12
3RT19 66-4EA1
3RW40 4.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
199
Accessories
16.4 Modules for RESET
For soft starter type
Size
Order No.
3RW40 2 to 3RW40 4.
S0, S2, S3
3RW49 00-0PB10
3RW40 5. and
3RW40 7
S6
S12
3RW49 00-0PB00
Sealing covers
16.4
Modules for RESET
For soft starter type Size Version
Order No.
Modules for remote RESET, electrical
Operating range 0.85 to 1.1 x Us,
Power consumption AC 80 VA, DC 70 W,
ON time 0.2 s to 4 s,
Switching frequency 60/h
3RW40 5. and
3RW40 7.
S6,
S12
•
AC/DC 24 V ... 30 V
3RU19 00-2AB71
•
AC/DC 110 V ... 127 V
3RU19 00-2AF71
•
AC/DC 220 V ... 250 V
3RU19 00-2AM71
•
Resetting plunger, holder, and former
3RU19 00-1A
•
Suitable pushbutton IP65, 22 mm diameter,
12 mm stroke
3SB30 00-0EA11
•
Extension plunger
3SX13 35
Mechanical RESET, comprising
3RW40 5. and
3RW40 7.
S6,
S12
Cable releases with holder for RESET
For 6.5 mm diameter holes in the control panel; max. control panel thickness 8 mm
3RW40 5. and
S6,
•
Length 400 mm
3RU19 00-1B
3RW40 7.
S12
•
Length 600 mm
3RU19 00-1C
Note
Remote RESET is already integrated in the 3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4. soft starters.
200
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Accessories
16.5 Link modules to 3RV10 motor starter protectors
16.5
Link modules to 3RV10 motor starter protectors
For soft starter type
Size
Motor starter
protector size
Order No.
Link modules to 3RV10 motor starter protectors
3RW30 13,
3RW30 14,
3RW30 16,
3RW30 17,
3RW30 18
S00
S0
3RA19 21-1A
3RW30 26
S0
S0
3RA19 21-1A
S2
S2
3RA19 31-1A
S3
S3
3RA19 41-1A
3RW40 24
3RW40 26
3RW30 36
3RW40 36
3RW30 46,
3RW30 47
3RW40 46,
3RW40 47
16.6
Link modules to 3RV20 motor starter protectors
For soft starter type
Size
Motor starter
protector size
Order No.
Link modules to 3RV20 motor starter protectors 1)
With screw terminals
3RW30 1.
S00
S00
3RA29 21-1BA00
3RW30 2.
S0
S0
3RA29 21-1BA00
3RW40 2.
S0
S0
3RA29 21-1BA00
S00
3RA29 11-2GA00
With spring-loaded terminals
3RW30 1.
S00
3RW30 2.
S0
S0
3RA29 21-2GA00
3RW40 2
S0
S0
3RA29 21-2GA00
1) Size S0 can be used up to 32 A.
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
201
Accessories
16.7 Optional fan to increase the switching frequency (3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.).
16.7
Optional fan to increase the switching frequency (3RW40 2. to
3RW40 4.).
For soft starter type
Size
Order No.
Fan (to increase the switching frequency and for device mounting in positions different from the normal position)
16.8
16.9
3RW40 2.
S0
3RW49 28-8VB00
3RW40 3.,
3RW40 4
S2,
S3
3RW49 47-8VB00
Spare parts for fans (3RW40 5., 3RW40 7.)
For soft starter type
Size
Version
Rated control supply
voltage Us
Order No.
3RW40 5.-.BB3.
S6
115 V AC
3RW49 36-8VX30
3RW40 5.-.BB4.
S6
230 V AC
3RW49 36-8VX40
3RW40 7.-.BB3.
S12
115 V AC
3RW47 36-8VX30
3RW40 7.-.BB4.
S12
230 V AC
3RW47 36-8VX40
Operating instructions
For soft starter type
Size
Order No.
3RW30 1. to 3RW30 4.
S00 to S3
3ZX10 12-0RW30-2DA1
3RW40 2. to 3RW40 4.
S0 to S3
3ZX10 12-0RW40-1AA1
3RW40 5., 3RW40 7.
S6 , S12
3ZX10 12-0RW40-2DA1
Operating instructions for soft starters
Note
The operating instructions are included in the scope of supply.
202
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
A
Appendix
A.1
Configuration data
Configuration data
Siemens AG
Technical Support Low-Voltage Control Systems
Phone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
e-mail: [email protected]
1. Motor data
Siemens motor?
Rated output:
kW
Rated voltage:
V
Mains frequency:
Hz
Rated current:
A
Starting current:
A
Rated speed:
rpm
Rated torque:
Nm
Breakdown torque:
Nm
Mass moment of inertia:
kg*m2
Speed / torque characteristic curve
(The speed increments of the value pairs do not have to be equal)
nM 1/m
"nsyn"
MM / MB
Speed / current characteristic curve
(The speed increments of the value pairs do not have to be equal)
nM 1/m
"nsyn"
IM / IB
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
203
Appendix
A.1 Configuration data
1. Load data
Load type (e.g. pump, mill etc.):
Rated speed:
rpm
Rated torque or rated output
Nm or kW
Mass moment of inertia (load-specific)
kg*m2
Mass moment of inertia (motor-specific)
kg*m2
Speed / torque characteristic curve
(The speed increments of the value pairs do not have to be equal)
nL 1/m
"nsyn"
ML / MB
1. Start conditions
Starting frequency
Switching
cycles:
Starts
Rampup time
Operating time
Idle time
Ramp-down time
Ambient temperature
°C
Yes
Value
Starting current limitation?
...............
Acceleration torque limitation?
...............
Maximum ramp-up time?
...............
1. Personal details
Last name, first name:
Company: ..................................................................................................................................
Department: ............................................................................................................................
Street: ................................................................................................................................
Zip code, town/city:
.............................................................................................................................
Country: ...................................................................................................................................
Phone: .....................................................................................................................................
Fax: .....................................................................................................................................
e-mail: .................................................................................................................................
204
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
5:BBBBBB%BB
5:BBBBBB%BB
5:BBBBBB%BB
5:BBBBBB%BB
5:BBBBBB%BB
5:7%
3ODQWLGHQWLILHU
5:BBBBBB%BB
,QVWDOOHG5:W\SH
3XPS;<=
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8VWDUWLQJ
8
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
V
W
WUDPSXSV
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
V
W
WUDPSGRZQV
,H
,H
,H
,H
,H
,H
,H
,H
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
,HPRWRU$
[ ,H ,H
,H
,H
,H
,H
,H
[,H
$
$
$
$
$
$
,
[$
$
,
)DFWRU,HOLPLWYDOXH
&/$66
&/$66
&/$66
&/$66
&/$66
&/$66
&/$66
&/$66
2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
&/$66YDOXH
RII
;
\HOORZ JUHHQ
0DQXDO $872 5HPRWH
5(6(702'(/('
2XWSXW
7KHUPLVWRU
21581
21
5:SDUDPHWHUV
;
581
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
;
37&
A.2
.OL[RQ
3DUDPHWHUV
5:RU5:
Appendix
A.2 Table of parameters used
Table of parameters used
You can document your parameter settings in the table below.
205
Appendix
A.3 Correction sheet
A.3
Correction sheet
TO
FROM (please
complete):
SIEMENS AG
Name
A&D CD MM3
Company / Department
92220 Amberg / Germany
Address
Phone
Fax: 0 96 21 / 80-33 37
Fax
System Manual for SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40 soft starters
Have you noticed any errors while reading this manual?
If so, please use this form to tell us about them.
We welcome comments and suggestions for improvement.
206
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Index
Numerics
3RW44 15, 28, 95
Documentation of parameters 205
Documentation of settings 205
3RW44 soft starter 15, 28, 95
F
A
Accessories 199
Ambient temperature 80
Application examples 76
Heavy-duty starting 78
Normal starting 77
Applications 22
For current limiting 30
Soft stop 32
Assembly type 81, 84
ATEX 33, 134
Fan 53
Fault signals 37, 39, 45, 47, 60, 97, 118
Five safety rules for electricians 13, 58
Full motor protection 33
H
Heavy-duty starting 62, 78
Ambient temperature 78
General conditions and constraints 78
Installation altitude 78
ON time 78
Parameter settings 78
B
Bypass contacts 96, 104, 109
Bypass mode 19
BYPASSED function 42
C
Capacitors 62
CLASS 10 76, 77, 107
CLASS 15 107
CLASS 20 78, 107
CLASS potentiometer 106
CLASS setting 33, 34, 106
Commissioning 92, 99
Configuration 73
Configurator 86
Contact 57
Current limiting 24, 27, 29, 30, 103, 104
Current limiting value 29, 104
D
Degree of protection 56
Device combinations 25
Diagnostics 44, 47, 97, 118
Direct mounting 56
Disconnector 57
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
I
Ie potentiometer 106
Increased safety 33, 134
Installation altitude 80
CLASS 10 77
CLASS 20 78
Normal starting 77
Intrinsic device protection 35
M
Maximum ramp-up time 77, 78
Method of operation
Soft starters 19
Two-phase control 20
Motor current settings 107
Motor overload protection 33
Motor protection function 32
Motor ramp-up detection 104
Motor ramp-up time 95
Mounting position 81, 84
Horizontal 53
Vertical 53, 80
207
Index
N
S
Natural stop 31
Normal starting 73, 77, 122, 136, 138, 140, 142, 144
Ambient temperature 77
General conditions and constraints 77
Installation altitude 77
ON time 77
Parameter settings 77
Safety rules 13, 58
Screw-type technology 65
Selection criteria 22
Semiconductor fuses 36
Side-by-side assembly 55
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter 15, 28, 95
SIRIUS modular system 25
SITOR 36
SITOR semiconductor fuses 36
Soft start 19, 94, 101
Soft stop 19, 105
Spring-loaded technology 65
Standalone assembly 55
Start 19
Start modes 73
Starting current 16
Starting current asymmetry 29, 104
Starting torque 16, 27
Starting voltage 27
Startup class 76
Stop 19
Stop modes 30
Stop without load 31, 105
Stopping torque 31
Switching frequency 79, 85
O
ON function 42, 109
ON time 79
Heavy-duty starting 78
Normal starting 77
Online configurator 86
Output contact 96, 109
Overload protection 34
P
Phase angle control 20
Polarity balancing 20, 21
PROFIBUS 15
Protection against voltage failure 35
PTC thermistors 35
Pump stop 31
T
R
Ramp time 27, 94, 95, 102
Ramp-down time 31, 105
Ramp-up 104
Ramp-up detection 28, 30, 76
Ramp-up time 95
3RW30 95
3RW40 102
ramp-up time
Maximum 77, 78
Rated data
Reduction 80
Rated operational current 106
Recovery time
Intrinsic device protection 35
Motor overload protection 34
Thermistor motor protection 35
Reduced starting current 17
RESET MODE 115
RUN function 42, 109
208
t potentiometer 102, 105
Technical Assistance 12
Temperature sensor 35
Thermistor motor protection 33, 35, 108, 134, 167
Thermoclick sensors 35
Three-phase induction motor 15, 18
Thyristor 19, 20
Thyristor protection 36
Trip class 33, 34, 106
Troubleshooting 44, 47, 97, 118
Two-phase control 20
Two-phase soft starters 20
Type of coordination 36, 59, 60, 61, 62, 128
1 128, 155
2 128, 155
U
Ultra-heavy-duty starting 15
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Index
V
Voltage ramp 27, 29, 94, 101, 102
W
Water hammer 31
Win-Soft Starter 86
Win-Soft Starter software 86
X
xIe potentiometer 104
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
209
Index
210
SIRIUS 3RW30 / 3RW40
Manual, 01/2010, 535 1995-02 DS01
Service & Support
Download catalogs and information material:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/catalogs
Newsletter – always up to date:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/newsletter
E-business in the Industry Mall:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall
Online-Support:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
Contact for all technical information:
Technical Assistance
Tel.: +49 (911) 895-5900
e-mail: [email protected]
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/automation
Subject to change without prior notice
Order No.: 3ZX1012-0RW30-1AC1
© Siemens AG 2010
Similar pages